Flujómetro Intertec

Intelligent Vortex Flowmeters
Model 84C with Modbus Communication

Master Instruction
MI 019-224
Release date June 22, 2022
pasupport.schneider-electric.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished
for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide
or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as is"
basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated,
serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this manual or on the equipment to warn of
potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that accompany this symbol to
avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences
arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction,
installation, and operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to
recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
MI 019-224 3
Table of Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................9
Reference Documents......................................................................................9
Terminology ...................................................................................................10
Communication Parameters............................................................................10
Operating Conditions...................................................................................... 11
Functional Specifications ................................................................................ 11
Response Time (Without Damping)............................................................ 11
Outputs....................................................................................................12
Pulse Output Specifications.......................................................................12
Power Supply Requirements .....................................................................12
Flowmeter Ranges ...................................................................................13
Nominal Flow Velocity Limits .....................................................................13
Reference K-Factor ..................................................................................13
Flowing K-Factor ......................................................................................13
Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor ....................................................13
K-Factor Bias ...........................................................................................14
Static Pressure Limits ...............................................................................14
Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure
Conditions) ..............................................................................................14
Pressure Tolerance...................................................................................15
Units .............................................................................................................15
FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application..................................................................21
Physical Specifications ...................................................................................21
Process Wetted Materials .........................................................................21
Housing Covers........................................................................................22
Environmental Protection ..........................................................................22
NACE Certification ...................................................................................22
Approximate Mass....................................................................................22
Maximum Working Pressure ...........................................................................24
Electrical Certifications ...................................................................................27
Installation .......................................................................................................29
Unpacking .....................................................................................................29
Flowmeter Identification..................................................................................31
Piping............................................................................................................32
Hydrostatic Piping Testing .........................................................................32
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance ..............................................32
Process Fluids ...............................................................................................33
Liquid Installations ....................................................................................33
Gas Installations.......................................................................................34
Steam Installations ...................................................................................35
Insulation.......................................................................................................36
Vibration........................................................................................................37
Ambient Temperature Limitations and Considerations .......................................37
Recommended Mounting Arrangements ....................................................38
Meter Servicing..............................................................................................39
MI 019-224 5
Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps.....................................................39

Installing the Flowmeter Body .........................................................................40
Flanged Body (84CF)................................................................................40
Wafer Body (84CW)..................................................................................42
NPT Body (84CN).....................................................................................43
Sanitary Body (84CS) ...............................................................................44
Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing .......................................................47
Cover Locks ..................................................................................................48
Positioning the Display ...................................................................................49
Setting the Write Protect Jumper .....................................................................49
Positioning the Housing ..................................................................................50
Electrical Installation.......................................................................................50
Field Termination Wiring............................................................................50
Remotely Mounted Electronics ..................................................................52
Loop Wiring .............................................................................................55
Wiring a Flowmeter with a Pulse Output .....................................................57
Operating the Flowmeter ...............................................................................58
Personalities..................................................................................................58
Flowmeter Functions and Actions ....................................................................60
Status ...........................................................................................................61
Setup ............................................................................................................61
Recommended Setup Procedure...............................................................63
Setting Fluid Parameters...........................................................................64
Setting Tuning Parameters........................................................................69
Setting Measurement Parameters..............................................................70
Setting Totalizer Parameters .....................................................................73
Setting Output Parameters ........................................................................76
Setting Piping Parameters.........................................................................83
Setting Flowtube Parameters ....................................................................85
Setting Advanced Options.........................................................................86
Resetting the Database.............................................................................87
Calibration and Test........................................................................................87
Calibration ...............................................................................................88
Test .........................................................................................................89
Pulse Actions.................................................................................................90
Totalizer Actions.............................................................................................91
Messages......................................................................................................91
Using the Local Display .................................................................................95
Local Display and Home Screen......................................................................95
Measurement ................................................................................................96
Using the Flowmeter Software.........................................................................96
Using Passwords......................................................................................96
Activating an Edit, Pick List, or User Menu Block.........................................99
Editing Numbers and Strings .....................................................................99
Picking from a List ....................................................................................99
Accessing the Menu System from the Home Screen ....................................... 100
Configuration Example ................................................................................. 100
6 MI 019-224
Configuring a User Fluid.......................................................................... 100

Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow................................................... 102
Displaying Total Mass ............................................................................. 102
Menus ......................................................................................................... 103
Menus for the General and Steam Personalities........................................ 104
Menus for the Oil & Gas Personality......................................................... 134
Modbus RTU Operation............................................................................... 143
Modbus Commands ..................................................................................... 143
Broadcast Messages .................................................................................... 144
Listen Only Mode ......................................................................................... 145
Registers..................................................................................................... 145
Coils ........................................................................................................... 162
Measurement Unit (EGU) Codes ................................................................... 164
Modbus RTU Display Instructions.............................................................. 171
Overview ..................................................................................................... 171
RTU Item Enable/Disable ............................................................................. 171
RTU Item with No Data (Uninitialized State) ................................................... 172
RTU Scan Enable/Disable ............................................................................ 172
RTU Default Item ......................................................................................... 172
RTU Item Text.............................................................................................. 173
Example ................................................................................................ 173
Writing an ASCII RTU Item ........................................................................... 174
Writing a Decimal RTU ................................................................................. 175
Additional Information................................................................................... 176
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 178
Transmitter Does Not Respond ..................................................................... 178
Output Indicates Flow When There Is No Flow ............................................... 178
No Output with Flow ..................................................................................... 179
No or Low Output with Remotely Mounted Electronics .................................... 180
Testing the Electronics Module ................................................................ 181
Other Incorrect Output .................................................................................. 182
Setting the LFCI ........................................................................................... 183
Troubleshooting the Temperature Sensor....................................................... 184
Maintenance .................................................................................................. 185
Replacing the Electronics Module.................................................................. 187
Removing the Electronics Module............................................................ 187
Installing the Electronics Module.............................................................. 189
Replacing the Potted Neck Module ................................................................ 190
Removing the Potted Neck Module .......................................................... 191
Installing the Potted Neck Module ............................................................ 191
Replacing the Preamplifier ............................................................................ 193
Removing the Preamplifier ...................................................................... 194
Installing the Preamplifier ........................................................................ 194
Replacing the Sensor ................................................................................... 195
Replacing or Adding a Digital Display/Configurator ......................................... 195
Model Code ................................................................................................... 196
Flanged Body Style ...................................................................................... 196
MI 019-224 7
Wafer Body Style ......................................................................................... 200

NPT (Threaded) Body Style .......................................................................... 203
Sanitary Body Style ...................................................................................... 206
Nominal Dimensions .................................................................................... 208
Dimensions for 84C Flanged Body Flowmeters .............................................. 208
Dimensions for 84C Wafer Body Flowmeters.................................................. 213
Dimensions for 84C NPT Body Flowmeters.................................................... 215
Dimensions for 84C Sanitary Flowmeters....................................................... 217
Parts List ........................................................................................................ 219
Electronics Housing...................................................................................... 219
Junction Box and Remote Mounting .............................................................. 222
Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts............................................................... 226
Optional Cable Selections -P and -R.............................................................. 230
Tamper-Resistant Cover for Bonnet Bolts (Option -S)...................................... 231
Recommended Spare Parts Summary........................................................... 232
8 MI 019-224
Introduction Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Introduction
Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters measure the flow rates of fluids (liquid, gas, or steam)
using the principle of vortex shedding. Fluid flowing through the flowmeter body
passes a specially shaped vortex shedder that causes vortices to form and shed
alternately from the sides of the shedder at a rate proportional to the flow rate of the
fluid. These shedding vortices create an alternating differential pressure that is
sensed by a detector located above the shedder. A pulsed voltage is generated by the
detector with a frequency that is synchronous with the vortex shedding frequency.
This signal is then conditioned by an electronics module and processed by a
microcontroller to produce a digital signal and a pulse signal that is proportional to the
volumetric flow rate. These signals can be mapped to a variety of measurements.
All flowmeters, except Sanitary, are available with an optional integrated platinum
RTD temperature sensor, which allows temperature compensation for density of
saturated steam. With built-in ASME-based steam tables,1 a Model 84C Vortex
Flowmeter with the temperature compensation option performs mass flow metering of
saturated steam, including specific enthalpy (heat content) and rate of heat flow.
In addition, a Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter with the RTD option provides algorithms
for temperature-compensated mass flow of any user-defined liquid.
The flowmeter is offered with a flanged (84CF), wafer (84CW), NPT male threaded
(84CN), or sanitary (84CS) body design.
The flowmeter can be configured locally or remotely. If your flowmeter has an optional
LCD display, pushbuttons allow you to easily configure the flowmeter locally. To
configure the flowmeter remotely, use a Modbus RTU host.
Reference Documents
Document Description
MI 019-222 Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

MI 019-224 Model 84C with Modbus Communication
MI 019-177 Vortex Flowmeter FM and CSA Connection Diagrams
MI 019-179 Flow Products Safety Information (ATEX and IECEx)
1. Saturated steam based on ASME International Steam Tables for Industrial Use (Second Edition), 2009.
MI 019-224 9
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Introduction
Terminology
This section defines terms that are used throughout this document.
Term Description
Soft Limits The maximum and minimum limits within which a measurement is expected to
operate. These limits are based on the user-entered upper range value (URV) for
each measurement. Measurement values that are outside the soft limits, but within
the hard limits, are typically marked as alerts.
Hard Limits The maximum and minimum limits that a measurement cannot exceed.
Measurement values that are outside the hard limits are typically marked as bad.
Model Code The model code defines the options associated with a product.
Figure 1 - Sample Model Code
84CF010–MPRF1STFTJFD
FD: FM Explosionproof Certification
J: With Optional Digital Indicator/Configurator
T: Aluminum Integral 1/2-NPT Conduit Connections
F: Fluorolube fill, Standard Temperature Range, SS
T: Multivariable Temperature Compensation
S: Single Measurement
F1: ANSI Class 150 RF End Connection and Flange Rating
R: 316SS Body, Flange, and Shedder Bar Material
P: Standard Pulse Output Capability
M: Modbus Electronics
010: 1 inch (DN25, 25 mm) Nominal Line Size
F: Flanged Body Style
Communication Parameters
The flowmeter uses the Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode over a 2-wire
RS-485 multidrop serial connection for communication. The flowmeter functions as a
Modbus server (slave) device.
Table 1 - Modbus Communication Parameters
Communication Rate 4800, 9600 (default), or 19200 baud
Measurement Update Rate 4800 baud: 19 times/s
9600 baud: 38 times/s
19200 baud: 76 times/s

Parity none (default)
even
odd
Station Addressing Stations use Device Address 1 through 247:
• 99 is the default
• 0 is used for broadcast commands
10 MI 019-224
Operating Conditions
Operating limits are based on nonflashing, noncavitating conditions. A minimum
positive back pressure is required for proper operation to avoid these effects.
Table 2 - Operating Limits
Influence Operating Limits
Process Fluid liquid, gas, and steam
Process Temperature for Standard Temperature Flowmeters
With fluorolube fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F)
Material selection D or F)
With silicone fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F)
Material selection R or S)
With Neobee® M20 fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range and -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F)
Material selection C)
(Only available for sanitary flowmeter body)
Process Temperature for Extended Temperature Flowmeters
Unfilled (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and Material 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F)
selection A or B), without temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection N)
selection E or G) without temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection N)
selection A, B, E, or G) with temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection T)
Ambient Temperature (Housing)2
With local display -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)
Without local display -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F)
Relative Humidity 0 and 100%
Supply Voltage 9 and 30 V dc
Functional Specifications
Response Time (Without Damping)
Table 3 - Flowmeter Response Times
Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)
Digital Mode 0.5 second or the vortex shedding period for frequencies less than 2 Hz.
Pulse Output • Raw mode: Vortex shedding frequency

• Frequency or Pulse mode: 0.25 second or the vortex shedding period for
frequencies less than 2 Hz.
2. The 80°C (176°C) temperature is extended to 85°C (185°F) with certain electrical certifications. Refer to Electrical Certifications, page 27.
MI 019-224 11
Outputs
Table 4 - Flowmeter Outputs
Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)
Digital Digital information is conveyed using the Modbus RTU protocol over an RS-
485 interface communicating at a baud rate of up to 19200. See Modbus
Communication Parameters, page 10.
Pulse Output The pulse output can be configured with the electronics module in one of the
following modes:
• Raw Mode: The vortex shedding frequency is directly passed through,
providing an instantaneous, nondamped frequency output.
• Frequency mode: The frequency of this output is a 50% duty cycle
pulse output with a frequency range of 0 to 10,000 Hz, proportional to
zero flow to the full range flow rate/upper range value (URV).
• Pulse mode: The frequency of this output is also a 50% duty cycle pulse
output that is configured to provide a pulse when a determined
volumetric/totalized unit has flowed through the meter.
Output Combinations
The flowmeter requires two power and three digital communications lines. Pulse
output requires wiring an additional two lines.
Pulse Output Specifications

The pulse output is an externally powered 2-wire transistor switch type output. This
output can be configured using any applicable configuration device to select one of
three pulse output modes: raw, frequency, and pulse. The following specifications
apply to the three types of pulse output modes:
• Isolated 2-wire transistor switch
• Applied voltage: 5 to 30 V dc
• Maximum “ON” state voltage drop: 1.0 V dc
• Maximum “ON” state current: 20 mA dc
• Reverse polarity protected
• Short circuit protected
• Connectable to pull-up and pull-down counters
Power Supply Requirements

Supply Current:
• 10 mA dc nominal
• Pulse Output: 20 mA dc maximum
Supply Voltage:
• 9 and 30 V dc depending on electrical safety approvals and certifications.
12 MI 019-224
Flowmeter Ranges
The flowmeter is shipped with the flow range specified in the sales order or with a
default flow range equal to the meter capacity. You can rerange the flowmeter and
keep the same flow rate units, choose new flow rate units from a built-in menu-
selectable list, or enter custom flow rate units.
To determine flow velocity limits and use other sizing tools, refer to the FlowExpertPro
sizing program.
Nominal Flow Velocity Limits

Although the calculations in the following table apply for many applications, they
provide only nominal flow velocity limits. Use the FlowExpertPro™ sizing program for
your specific application.
Standard Temperature Range3 High Temperature Range4

Range Limit m/s ft/s m/s ft/s
Lower 3.0/√ρf 2.5/√ρf 6.0/√ρf 5.0/√ρf
Upper 300/√ρf 250/√ρf 300/√ρf 250/√ρf
Reference K-Factor
The reference K-factor is a coefficient that specifies the flowmeter calibration and is
expressed as pulses per unit volume; where pulses/unit volume = pulses per second
divided by volume flow per second.
The reference K-factor is the arithmetic mean value of K over the factory-calibrated
flow range. It is determined at the factory by actual flow calibration with water by
comparison to a master flowmeter calibration, or by actual static weight. Both
calibrations are traceable to NIST. The reference K-factor is entered in the flowmeter
database and stamped on the data plate. Once established, this K-factor is available
to gas, liquid, or steam.
Flowing K-Factor
The flowing K-factor is computed from the K-reference expressed in specified flowing
units, and can be corrected for the following:
• Process Temperature
• Mating Pipe
• Upstream Disturbances
Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor

There is an effect on the reference K-factor due to a diameter change of the flowtube
bore with temperature. The effect is -0.3% of flow rate per 55°C (100°F) increase in
temperature. These flowmeters automatically recompute a flowing K-factor based on
detected changes in process temperature.
3. Applies to flanged, wafer, NPT, and sanitary body styles.

4. Applies to flanged, wafer, and NPT body styles.
MI 019-224 13
K-Factor Bias
Provisions are made in the configuration menu to bias the flowmeter K-factor by a
percent (%) value. The flowing K-factor value is automatically recalculated when the
% bias is entered.
Static Pressure Limits

To determine the pressure drop for Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters and use other
sizing tools, refer to the FlowExpertPro sizing program (FlowExpertPro™ Sizing
Application, page 21).
Minimum Static Pressure

The minimum static pressure is that pressure which is sufficient to help prevent
flashing and meet the pressure drop requirements to attain maximum flow rate. Refer
to the FlowExpertPro sizing program.
Maximum Static Pressure

Where reference temperature is 37.8°C (100°F):
• Flanged Body: 3750 psig (258.6 bar, 25855 kPa) or that imposed by flange rating
• Wafer Body: 1500 psig (103.4 bar, 10340 kPa) or that imposed by flange rating
• NPT Body as imposed by equivalent flange ratings:
◦ Line size 010 equivalent to Class 1500 flanges
◦ Line size 020 equivalent to Class 900 flanges
• Sanitary Body as imposed by process piping:
◦ Line size DN50 (2 in): 1,725 kPa (250 psi)
◦ Line size DN80 (3 in): 1,035 kPa (150 psi)
Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure

Conditions)
Proper system design, and operation of the flowmeter within the rated flow rate range,
helps prevent conditions that tend to contribute to the release of vapor from the liquid
(flashing), which can also induce cavitation.
When locating the flowmeter, consider the need for a back pressure valve, or for
increasing inlet pressure. To help minimize flashing and support stable vortex
generation, the minimum back pressure should be:
PG = (3)(ΔP) + (1.25)(pv) – (patm)
Where:
• PG: Gauge pressure in kPa or psi five pipe diameters downstream of the
flowmeter
• ΔP: Pressure loss in psi or kPa
• pv: Vapor pressure at line conditions in psi or kPa absolute
• patm: Atmospheric pressure in psi or kPa absolute
14 MI 019-224
Pressure Tolerance
Flowmeters are designed to withstand pressure within ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150,
300, 600, 900, or 1500 flange ratings, and DIN EN 10921 PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63,
PN100, or PN160 flange ratings. See Maximum Working Pressure, page 24 for flange
pressure-temperature ratings.
For 84C wafer body flowmeters, the flowtube face outside diameter is designed to
center between ANSI Class 150 flanges. For other flange ratings, specify centering
spacers from the Mounting and Centering System selection in the Model Code.
Units
Table 5 - Absolute Pressure Units
Unit Description Fluid Restriction

kPaa kilopascals absolute No restriction
Paa pascals absolute No restriction
psia pounds per square inch absolute No restriction
Table 6 - Temperature Units

degC degrees Celsius No restriction
degF degrees Fahrenheit No restriction
degR degrees Rankine No restriction
K Kelvins No restriction
Table 7 - Density Units

g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter No restriction
kg/l kilograms per liter No restriction
kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter No restriction
lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot No restriction
lb/gal pounds per US gallon No restriction
lb/Yd3 pounds per cubic yard No restriction
LT/Yd3 long tons per cubic yard No restriction
oz/in3 ounces per cubic inch No restriction
ST/Yd3 short tons per cubic yard No restriction
Table 8 - Mass Rate Units

g/d grams per day No restriction
g/h grams per hour No restriction
g/m grams per minute No restriction
g/s grams per second No restriction
MI 019-224 15
Table 8 - Mass Rate Units (Continued)

kg/d kilograms per day No restriction
kg/h kilograms per hour No restriction
kg/m kilograms per minute No restriction
kg/s kilograms per second No restriction
lb/d pounds per day No restriction
lb/h pounds per hour No restriction
lb/m pounds per minute No restriction
lb/s pounds per second No restriction
LTon/d long tons (2240 lb) per day No restriction
LTon/h long tons (2240 lb) per hour No restriction
LTon/m long tons (2240 lb) per minute No restriction
mTon/d metric tons per day No restriction
mTon/h metric tons per hour No restriction
mTon/m metric tons per minute No restriction
mTon/s metric tons per second No restriction
oz/d ounces per day No restriction
oz/h ounces per hour No restriction
oz/m ounces per minute No restriction
oz/s ounces per second No restriction
STon/d short tons (2000 lb) per day No restriction
STon/h short tons (2000 lb) per hour No restriction
STon/m short tons (2000 lb) per minute No restriction
STon/s short tons (2000 lb) per second No restriction
Table 9 - Volume Rate Units

bbl/d barrels (42 US gallons) per day Liquids only
bbl/h barrels (42 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
bbl/m barrels (42 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
bbl/s barrels (42 US gallons) per second Liquids only
bbl3/d barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day Liquids only
bbl3/h barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
bbl3/m barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
bbl3/s barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second Liquids only
ft3/d cubic feet per day No restriction
ft3/h cubic feet per hour No restriction
ft3/m cubic feet per minute No restriction
ft3/s cubic feet per second No restriction
16 MI 019-224
Table 9 - Volume Rate Units (Continued)

gal/d US gallons per day Liquids only
gal/h US gallons per hour Liquids only
gal/m US gallons per minute Liquids only
gal/s US gallons per second Liquids only
Igal/d imperial gallons per day Liquids only
Igal/h imperial gallons per hour Liquids only
Igal/m imperial gallons per minute Liquids only
Igal/s imperial gallons per second Liquids only
l/d liters per day Not for vapor
l/h liters per hour Not for vapor
l/m liters per minute Not for vapor
l/s liters per second Not for vapor
m3/d cubic meters per day No restriction
m3/h cubic meters per hour No restriction
m3/m cubic meters per minute No restriction
m3/s cubic meters per second No restriction
mcft/d thousands of cubic feet per day No restriction
Mgal/d millions of US gallons per day Liquids only
Ml/d millions of liters per day Not for vapor
Ml/h millions of liters per hour Not for vapor
mmcft/d millions of cubic feet per day No restriction
Table 10 - Standard Volume Rate Units

mmScft/d millions of standard cubic feet per day Not for vapor
mScft/d thousands of standard cubic feet per day Not for vapor
Sbbl/d standard barrels (42 US gallons) per day Liquids only
Sbbl/h standard barrels (42 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
Sbbl/m standard barrels (42 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
Sbbl/s standard barrels (42 US gallons) per second Liquids only
Sbl3/d standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day Liquids only
Sbl3/h standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
Sbl3/m standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
Sbl3/s standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second Liquids only
Sft3/d standard cubic feet per day (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/h standard cubic feet per hour (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/m standard cubic feet per minute (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/s standard cubic feet per second (US system) Not for vapor
MI 019-224 17
Table 10 - Standard Volume Rate Units (Continued)

Sgal/d standard US gallons per day Liquids only
Sgal/h standard US gallons per hour Liquids only
Sgal/m standard US gallons per minute Liquids only
Sgal/s standard US gallons per second Liquids only
Sm3/d standard cubic meters per day Not for vapor
Sm3/h standard cubic meters per hour Not for vapor
Sm3/m standard cubic meters per minute Not for vapor
Sm3/s standard cubic meters per second Not for vapor
Table 11 - Normal Volume Rate Units

Nft3/s normal cubic feet per second Not for vapor
Ngal/d normal US gallons per day Liquids only
Ngal/h normal US gallons per hour Liquids only
Ngal/m normal US gallons per minute Liquids only
Ngal/s normal US gallons per second Liquids only
Nl/d normal liters per day (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/h normal liters per hour (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/m normal liters per minute (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/s normal liters per second (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/d normal cubic meters per day (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/h normal cubic meters per hour (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/m normal cubic meters per minute (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/s normal cubic meters per second (MKS System) Not for vapor
Table 12 - Mass Units

g grams No restriction
kg kilograms No restriction
lb pounds No restriction
LTon long tons (2240 lb) No restriction
mTon metric tons No restriction

oz ounces No restriction
STon short tons (2000 lb) No restriction
Table 13 - Volume Units

bbl liquid barrels (42 US gallons) No restriction
bbl3 liquid barrels (31.5 US gallons) No restriction
18 MI 019-224
Table 13 - Volume Units (Continued)

ft3 cubic feet No restriction
gal gallons No restriction
Igal imperial gallons No restriction
l liters No restriction
m3 cubic meters No restriction
mcft thousands of cubic feet No restriction
Mgal millions of US gallons No restriction
Ml millions of liters No restriction

mmcft millions of cubic feet No restriction
Table 14 - Standard Volume Units

mmScft millions of cubic feet No restriction
mScft thousands of cubic feet No restriction
SBBL standard liquid barrel (42 U.S. gallons) Not for vapor
SBL3 standard liquid barrel (31.5 U.S. gallons) Not for vapor
Sft3 standard cubic feet Not for vapor
Sgal standard US gallons Liquids only
Sm3 standard cubic meters Not for vapor
Table 15 - Normal Volume Units

Nft3 normal cubic feet Not for vapor
Ngal normal US gallons Liquids only
Nl normal liters (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3 normal cubic meters (MKS System) Not for vapor
Table 16 - Velocity Units

ft/d feet per day No restriction
ft/h feet per hour No restriction
ft/m feet per minute No restriction
ft/s feet per second No restriction
m/d meters per day No restriction
m/h meters per hour No restriction
m/m meters per minute No restriction
m/s meters per second No restriction
MI 019-224 19
Table 17 - Absolute Viscosity Units

cPoise centipoise No restriction
PaSec pascal seconds No restriction
Table 18 - Heat Content Units

BTU/lb British thermal units per pound No restriction
J/kg joules per kilogram No restriction
KJ/kg kilojoules per kilogram No restriction
MCal/kg megacalories per kilogram No restriction
Table 19 - Energy Units

BTU British thermal units5 No restriction
J joules No restriction
MCal megacalories6 No restriction
MJ megajoules No restriction
Table 20 - Heat Flow Units

BTU/h British thermal units per hour5 No restriction
J/s joules per second No restriction
MCal/h megacalories per hour6 No restriction
MJ/h megajoules per hour No restriction
Table 21 - K-Factor Units

m3/p cubic meters per pulse No restriction
p/ft3 pulses per cubic foot No restriction
p/l pulses per liter No restriction
Table 22 - Miscellaneous Units
Measurement Unit Description Fluid Restriction

Frequency Hz hertz No restriction
Pulse Pulse pulses No restriction
Resistance ohms ohms No restriction

Potential Volt volts No restriction
5. 1 BTU = 0.2519958 kcal.

6. 1 calorie = 4.184 joules.
20 MI 019-224
FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application

The FlowExpertPro application helps with flowmeter type selection as well as
flowmeter sizing. In addition, the FlowExpertPro application offers:
• A large library of the physical properties of typical process fluids.
• Tabular and graphic presentation of results.
• Options to save, print, and email results.
• Access to applicable flowmeter PSS documents and related documentation.
The program calculates minimum and maximum flow rates, rangeability, pressure
loss, and Reynolds Number, using established flow equations. It also allows for
material and flange selection, and provides ANSI and DIN flange recommendations
for predicted flow pressure and temperature.
You can access this tool at the free website www.FlowExpertPro.com, or on a mobile
device with the iOS or Android operating system.
Website
App Store (Apple®) Google Play™ Store (Android®)
www.FlowExpertPro.com
Contact Global Customer Support for further information and technical support.
Physical Specifications
Process Wetted Materials
Parts 84CF (Flanged) 84CW (Wafer) 84CN (NPT) 84CS (Sanitary)
Body and Cast 316 ss Cast 316 ss Cast 316 ss Tube: 316/316L ss
Shedder Bar (CF8M) (CF8M) (CF8M) Shedder Bar:
or 304 ss or nickel alloy7 316L ss
(CW2M) (ASTM 276)
End Connection 316 ss N/A cast 316 ss 316 ss

or 304 ss (CF8M)
Sensor Seals 316 ss, N/A

316 ss/grafoil,
nickel alloy7 (CW2M),
or nickel alloy7 (CW2M)/grafoil
Detector 316 ss or nickel alloy8 316 ss

Diaphragm
7. Equivalent to Hastelloy® C-4C. Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.

8. Equivalent to Hastelloy®.
MI 019-224 21
Housing Covers
A two compartment housing separates the electronics from the field connections.
Housing and covers are low copper (0.6% maximum) die-cast aluminum alloy with an
epoxy finish. O-ring seals are used to seal the housing covers, housing neck, and
terminal block.
Environmental Protection
The electronics housing has the dust tight and weatherproof rating of IP66 as defined
by IEC 60529, and provides the environmental and corrosion resistant protection
rating of NEMA Type 4X.
NACE Certification
The Model 84C flowmeters have been designed to meet the requirements of NACE
Standard MR-0175-2003 for use in H2S Sour Oilfield environments. The design and
process wetted materials also comply with NACE Standard MR-0103-2007 for use in
corrosive petroleum refining environments. A NACE compliance certificate is available
by selecting model code option -Q option. See PSS 1-8A8 A and Model Code, page
196 for more information.
Approximate Mass
The following tables list masses of different configurations of 84C flowmeters. The
mass values shown are approximate and are meant as a guide.
Standard temperature flowmeter masses are listed for integrally mounted electronics
housings. There is a slight difference in mass for high temperature flowmeters, which
adds about 0.5 kg (1 lb), and for remote mounted housings (where the housing is
replaced by a connector head assembly and junction box). The electronics housing
itself weighs about 2 kg (4 lb) and varies slightly depending on whether the flowmeter
is equipped with the indicator/configurator or the extended housing covers.
Table 23 - Approximate Mass of Model 84C Flanged Flowmeters
Nominal Line Size Flange Specifications Mass
Model Code Size Type Material kg lb
008 0.75 in Class 150 316 ss 4.71 10.4

Class 1500 8.75 19.3
010 1 in Class 150 316 ss 5.53 12.2
Class 1500 11.02 24.3
015 1.5 in Class 150 316 ss 7.57 16.7
Class 1500 15.65 34.5
020 2 in Class 150 316 ss 9.48 20.9
Class 1500 24.58 54.2
030 3 in Class 150 316 ss 19.5 43
Class 1500 49.76 109.7
040 4 in Class 150 316 ss 21.05 46.4
Class 1500 70.72 155.9
22 MI 019-224
Table 23 - Approximate Mass of Model 84C Flanged Flowmeters (Continued)
Nominal Line Size Flange Specifications Mass
Model Code Size Type Material kg lb
060 6 in Class 150 316 ss 35.2 77.6

Class 600 77.92 178.1
Class 1500 161.93 357
080 8 in Class 150 316 ss 57.74 127.3
Class 600 131.26 289.4
Class 1500 298.1 657.2
100 10 in Class 150 304 ss 72.57 160
Class 600 216 476.2
120 12 in Class 150 304 ss 114.48 252.4
Class 600 245.12 540.4
008 DN15 PN40 316 ss 5.58 12.3
PN100 7.35 16.2
010 DN25 PN40 316 ss 6.08 13.4
PN160 8.66 19.1
015 DN40 PN40 316 ss 8.12 17.9
PN160 12.79 28.2
020 DN50 PN40 316 ss 9.84 21.7
PN160 17.42 38.4
030 DN80 PN40 316 ss 15.1 33.3
PN160 26.58 58.6
040 DN100 PN40 316 ss 20.14 44.4
PN160 36.83 81.2
060 DN150 PN16 316 ss 27.89 61.5
PN160 88.81 195.8
080 DN200 PN16 316 ss 43 94.8
PN160 161.79 356.7
100 DN250 PN16 304 ss 65.13 143.6
PN100 191.23 421.6
120 DN300 PN16 304 ss 92.71 204.4
PN100 280.32 618
Table 24 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Wafer Flowmeters with 316 ss Body
Material
Nominal Line Size Mass
Model Code mm in kg lb
008 DN15 0.75 2.3 5

010 DN25 1 2.7 6
015 DN40 1.5 3.2 7
020 DN50 2 4.5 10
030 DN80 3 8 18
040 DN100 4 11.5 25
MI 019-224 23
Table 24 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Wafer Flowmeters with 316 ss Body
Material (Continued)
Nominal Line Size Mass
060 DN150 6 16 35
080 DN2000 8 27 60
Table 25 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C NPT Flowmeters
Nominal Line Size Weight
010 DN25 1 2.7 6

020 DN50 2 4.5 10
Table 26 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Sanitary Flowmeters
Weight with Connection C0 or

Nominal Line Size Flowmeter T09
Description
020 DN50 2 Body and 0.7 1.6

Cable
Housing and 4.1 6.5
Bracket
Total 4.8 8.1
030 DN80 3 Body and 1.1 2.5
Cable
Housing and 4.1 6.5
Bracket
Total 5.2 9.0
Maximum Working Pressure

The maximum working pressure (MWP) of the flowmeter at 38°C (100°F) is shown on
the data label.
Flanged Body Flowmeters

The MWP at various temperatures for a flanged body flowmeter is shown in the
following graphs. To identify the applicable chart, refer to the model code printed on
the data label for the nominal line size, flange material, and end connection type
(flange rating):
9. See Model Code table for sanitary body.
24 MI 019-224
84CF020-TPR F1...
END CONNECTIONS
(F1=ANSI Class 150)
BODY AND FLANGE MATERIAL

(R=316 ss Flanges for 2" Line Size)
NOMINAL LINE SIZE

(020=2 inches)
Refer to Model Code, page 196 for an explanation of these codes.
Figure 2 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 316 ss ANSI Flanges, Line Sizes 008 to 040 (3/4 to 4 Inches), per
ASME B16.5, Group 2.2 Materials
200°F 400°F 800°F
Fluorolube Silicone Extended
sensor sensor temp. limit
4000 limit limit (no fill)
CL 1500
3600
3500
ANSI Flanges, 316 ss

3000
PROCESS PRESSURE (psig)
2500
CL 900
2160 2110
2000
CL 600
1440 1500
1265
1000
CL 300 845
720
500
CL 150 420
275
80
0
-20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °F
MI 019-224 25
Figure 3 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 304 ss ANSI Flanges, Line Sizes 060 to 120 (6 to 12 inches), per
ASME B16.5, Group 2.1 Materials
200°F 400°F 800°F
4000 limit limit (no fill)
CL 1500
3600
3500
ANSI Flanges, 304 ss

3000
PROCESS PRESSURE (psig)
2500
CL 900
2160
2000 2030
CL 600
1440 1500
1215
1000
CL 300 810
720
500
CL 150 405
275
0 80
-20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °F
Figure 4 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 316 ss Metric Flanges, Line Sizes 008 to 040 (DN15 to DN100), per
EN 1092-1, Material Group 14E0
90°C 200°C 430°C
limit limit (no fill)
180
PN160
160 Metric Flanges, 316 ss
140
120
PROCESS PRESSURE (barg)
108.6
PN100
100
80
PN63 67.8
60
PN40 42.7
40
PN25
27.1
20 16.9
PN16 10.8
0
-10 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 430
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °C
26 MI 019-224
Figure 5 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 304 ss Metric Flanges, Line Sizes 060 to 120 (DN150 to DN300), per
EN 1092-1, Material Group 10E0
90°C 200°C 430°C
limit limit (no fill)
180
PN160
160 Metric Flanges, 304 ss
140
120
PROCESS PRESSURE (barg)
PN100
100
86.7
80
PN63
60
54.2
PN40
40
34.1
PN25
20 21.6
13.5
PN16 8.6
0
-10 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 430
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °C
Wafer Body Flowmeters

The wafers are designed for a maximum PN100 (ANSI Class 600) working pressure.
NPT Flowmeters
For line size code 010, the pressure rating is comparable ANSI Class 1500.
For line size code 020, the pressure rating is comparable to ANSI Class 900.
Sanitary Body Flowmeter

Sanitary Body as imposed by process piping:
• Line size DN50 (2 in): 1,725 kPa (250 psi) at 37.8°C (100°F)
• Line size DN80 (3 in): 1,035 kPa (150 psi) at 37.8°C (100°F)
Electrical Certifications
These flowmeters have been designed to meet the electrical safety descriptions listed
in the following table. For detailed information or status of testing laboratory
approvals/certifications, contact Global Customer Support.
• Refer to MI 019-177 for FM and CSA connection diagrams.
MI 019-224 27
• Refer to MI 019-179 for ATEX and IECEx information.

Table 27 - Electrical Certifications
Model
Agency Certification, Types of Protection, and Area Classification Application Conditions Code
Option
ATEX Flameproof
Integral Electronics: II 2G; II 2D; Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb Sira 06ATEX2067X
Remote Electronics: II 2 (1) G; II 2D; Ex db [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C AD
ATEX Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
CSA Explosionproof with IS sensor connection for Class I, Div. 1,

Groups B, C, and D;
Temperature Class T5; Ta = 60°C (divisions)
CSA Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G; CD
Temperature Class T5; Ta = -40° to +80°C (zones)
Class III Div. 1;
Also Zone certified Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb; Dual Seal
IECEx Flameproof
Integral Electronics: Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb
Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C ED
Remote Electronics: Ex db [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb
IECEx Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
FM Explosionproof with IS sensor connection for Class I, Div.1, Groups

B, C, and D;
Temperature Class T5; Ta = 85°C FD
FM Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G;
Class III, Div. 1; T5
CE mark only; PED controls and records n/a YY
No CE mark; Do not install in European Union countries n/a ZZ
28 MI 019-224
Installation Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Installation
Process Fluid Warnings
WARNING
HAZARD OF ESCAPING CHEMICALS
If process containing parts are to be disassembled:
• Make sure that process fluid is not under pressure or at high temperature.
• Take proper precautions concerning leakage or spillage of any toxic or otherwise
dangerous fluid. Follow any Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or Safety Data
Sheet (SDS) recommendations.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
WARNING
HAZARD OF CORROSION
The flowmeters are built using materials that are corrosion resistant to a wide
variety of fluids. However, with aggressive fluids, a potential exists for corrosive
failure. Therefore, verify the material compatibility with the NACE guidelines and/or
user knowledge of the flowmeter material compatibility with the process fluid at
operating conditions.
equipment damage.
CAUTION
RISK OF PERSONAL AND PROPERTY DAMAGE
These flowmeters must be installed by trained personnel to meet all applicable local
installation regulations, such as hazardous location requirements, electrical wiring
codes, and mechanical piping codes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Unpacking
Your flowmeter is built to be durable, but it is part of a calibrated precision system and
should be handled as such.
• Flowmeters with remote-mounted electronics have a cable connecting the
flowmeter junction box and electronics housing. Do not allow the weight of either
the flowmeter body or the electronics housing to be supported by the remote
cable.
• Avoid dropping or otherwise subjecting the flowmeter to impact, particularly at the
flange faces.
• Never put anything through the flowmeter body for lifting purposes, as damage to
the shedder bar may occur.
To unpack the flowmeter:
MI 019-224 29
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Installation
1. Carefully remove the flowmeter body from the shipping carton.

NOTE: Wafer body meters may (depending on the pressure rating of the
flanges with which they used) have a set of centering spacers included. Do
not discard the spacers. They are needed to install the flowmeter properly.
2. Inspect the flowmeter for visible damage. If you see any damage, notify the
carrier immediately and request an inspection report. Obtain a signed copy of the
report from the carrier.
3. Remove the calibration certificate and any other documentation shipped with the
meter, and keep it for future reference.
4. Reinstall any flange covers or protective material to safeguard the meter until it is
installed.
5. Dispose of packing material in accordance with local regulations. All packing
material is nonhazardous and generally acceptable for landfills.
30 MI 019-224
Flowmeter Identification
Before installing your flowmeter, check its data plate to verify that it is correct for your
application. Specifications such as maximum ambient temperature, process
temperature, and working pressure are given on the data plate. The model code is
also stamped on the data plate as shown in Sample Flowmeter Dataplate, page 31
and can also be viewed from the Configuration menu. On flowmeters with remotely
mounted electronics, an additional data plate on the flowtube junction box (see
Sample Junction Box Data Plate, page 31) shows the Model Code and electrical
safety data. For interpretation of the Model Code, see Model Code, page 196.
Electrical certification information is located on the right end of the data plate.
To view the flowmeter’s software version on the display, navigate to the Status menu
and select 2 SW Rev.
Figure 6 - Sample Flowmeter Dataplate
Plant of Manufacture
and Date
Serial Model
Number Code Maximum Working
Pressure
MODEL 84CF040-MPRF1STATJFD ST. C

S/N 12345678 ORIGIN 2A0713
SUPPLY 24V dc nom., 22 mA max. MWP @ 100° F (38°C) 720 PSI Style Indicator
MAX. AMB. TEMP 176°F (80°C) MAX. PROC. TEMP. 500°F Maximum
Supply
REF K-FACT. 258 PULSES / ft3 - 9.11 PULSES / liter Process
Voltage K-FACTOR PULSES / Temperature
CUST. TAG CABLE ENTRIES
FM
THIS PRODUCT IS PROTECTED BY THE FOLLOWING PATENTS:
US 7,212,928; US 7,853,415; US 9,322,683; (Model 84C) APPROVED
AND EP 1585943. ADDITIONAL PATENTS ARE PENDING. FM16US0012X
Calibration Maximum Ambient

K-Factor Temperature
Figure 7 - Sample Junction Box Data Plate
STYLE
MODEL 84
Remote Terminal Box
MODEL NO: ST: C
S/N:
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
• Do not open when an explosive gas or dust
FM atmosphere is present.
• Substitution of components may impair
suitability for intrinsic safety.
Failure to follow these instructions can
APPROVED result in death or serious injury.
FM16US0012X
CABLE ENTRIES 1/2 NPT

IP66 /TYPE 4X ENCLOSURE
FIELD WIRING SHALL BE RATED FOR 85˚C
CLI, II,III DIV 1, GPS A,B,C,D,E,F&G;T4 Ta=- 40˚C to 80˚C
(IS) CL I ZN 0,AEx ia IIC T4 Ta = -40˚C to + 80˚C
When installed per control drawing MI 019-177
CL I,DIV 2,GPS A,B,C, & D;

(NI)
CL II,III,DIV 2,GPS EFG T4 Ta = - 40˚C to + 80˚C
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SYSTEMS USA, INC.

38 NEPONSET AVE.
FOXBORO, MA 02035
MI 019-224 31
Piping
Hydrostatic Piping Testing
The Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter is designed to meet the pressure limits of the flange
rating specified in the model code.
84CF***-***xy
END CONNECTION AND FLANGE RATING
If your flowmeter is being installed in an application where hydrostatic testing is

performed, do not remove the sensor from the flowmeter.
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance

Flanges
The flange of the adjoining pipe must be the same nominal size and pressure rating
as the flowmeter. Flanges with a smooth bore, similar to weld neck flanges, are
preferred.
Mating Pipe
Your flowmeter was calibrated at the factory with Schedule 40 piping upstream and
downstream of the meter. If your application does not have Schedule 40 pipe, enter
the appropriate pipe size during configuration. This assures that the calibration factor
and flowmeter accuracy are maintained.
High-pressure meters (Class 900 and PN160 for 6- and 8-inch line sizes and Class
1500 for line sizes greater than 2 inches) were calibrated using Schedule 160
because the meter bore is also Schedule 160.
Upstream and Downstream Disturbances

The flowmeter should normally be mounted in a straight, unobstructed pipe with a
minimum of 30 pipe diameters upstream of the meter and five pipe diameters
downstream (see Typical Piping Configuration, page 39). For those installations
where this upstream requirement is not met, the type of disturbance must be selected
from a pick list during transmitter configuration and the distance to the disturbance in
pipe diameters entered. This assures that the flowmeter accuracy is maintained.
Piping Alignment
The bores of the pipe (flange) and flowmeter must be aligned (see Installing the
Flowmeter Body, page 40), and the flange gaskets installed such that they do not
protrude into the flow stream. If the adjoining piping cannot be properly aligned, make
the best possible alignment with the upstream flange. This minimizes the flow
disturbance in the flowmeter.
Flowmeters mounted near pump discharge or suction lines may be exposed to
oscillatory flow that may affect vortex shedding or product pipe vibration. Also,
flowmeters mounted near the discharge of a liquid positive displacement pump or
near oscillating control valves may experience severe flow fluctuations that could
32 MI 019-224
damage the sensor. To avoid these adverse situations, install the meter at least 20
feet or 40 pipe diameters, whichever is larger, from the disturbance in question.
Good piping practice requires that the internal surface of the pipe be free from mill
scale, pits, holes, reaming scores, rifling, bumps, or other irregularities for at least four
pipe diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream of the meter.
Process Temperature
Your flowmeter was calibrated at 21°C (70°F). If your process temperature is different
and the flowmeter does not have temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection
N), enter the appropriate process operating temperature during configuration.
However, if the flowmeter does have temperature compensation (Multivariable
Selection T), the temperature sensor in the flowmeter measures the actual
temperature of the process material flowing through the meter. Your flowmeter adjusts
the calibration factor to account for thermal expansion of the metals due to process
temperatures that are different from the reference calibration temperature.
Pipe Position
Piping should be planned to maintain full pipe conditions at the flowmeter. When flow
is moving with gravity, elevate the downstream pipe length above the meter
installation level to maintain a full pipeline.
Mounting Position
For optimal performance, consider the mounting locations of the sensor and integral
electronics relative to the piping. Factors that influence this decision include process
fluid type, ambient temperature, and vibration. Mount the meter in accordance with the
installation guidelines for process fluids described in Process Fluids, page 33. Also
see Recommended Mounting Arrangements, page 38.
Process Fluids
Liquid Installations
For liquid flow installations, mount the meter upstream at least five pipe diameters
from the control valve. In vertical installations, the meter should be mounted in the
upward flowing leg. This helps to maintain a full pipe and helps to ensure that there is
sufficient back pressure to prevent flashing or cavitation.
For liquid installations with occasional gas pockets or bubble formation, install piping
as shown so as to not trap the gas pockets or bubbles inside the flowmeter.
MI 019-224 33
Figure 8 - Piping Arrangements10
PIPE
NOT
FULL
BAD
BAD
GOOD GOOD GOOD
GOOD
BAD
• For clean liquids, the electronics housing can be mounted either above or below
the flowmeter body.
• The electronics housing can also be positioned to the side. This allows entrapped
air to escape.
• Take care that entrapped air does not accumulate in the sensor cavity.
• If the meter is used with liquid, mount it upstream of a control valve.
Gas Installations
For gas flow installations, several choices for flowmeter location can be considered.
For maximum rangeability, locate the flowmeter 30 or more pipe diameters
downstream from a control valve. This ensures maximum velocity at the flowmeter
and produces the most efficient signal from the sensor. This is especially
recommended when several flowmeters/control valves are coming off a common
header or pipe.
When the flow is more stable, the flowmeter can be mounted a minimum of five (5)
pipe diameters upstream of the control valve. Pressure fluctuations often are lower on
the upstream side of a control valve flow than on the downstream side. This is
recommended when a pressure sensor is used with a flowmeter to provide inputs to a
flow computer.
On gas flow installations, avoid piping conditions that create standing pockets of
liquids inside the meter. The best approach is to install the meter in a vertical line with
flow in the upwards direction.
10. Not drawn to scale.
34 MI 019-224
NOTICE
WATER HAMMER FROM TRAPPED CONDENSATE
Trapped condensate can cause a “water hammer” during startup. If you cannot
drain the condensate, open the valve slowly, allowing any trapped condensate to
travel downstream through the flowmeter at low velocity so that no damage occurs.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Figure 9 - Piping for Gas Applications11
BAD
STANDING
POCKET OF
LIQUID IN GOOD
GOOD FLOWMETER
When the process fluid is gas, the electronics housing can be above or below the
flowmeter body. The normal recommended position of the electronics housing is
above the flowmeter body.
Steam Installations
For steam control installations, mount the flowmeter 30 pipe diameters or more
downstream of the control valve. This is particularly useful when measuring saturated
steam to help ensure that a minimum amount of condensate is present at the
flowmeter.
NOTICE
WATER HAMMER FROM TRAPPED CONDENSATE
Trapped condensate can cause a “water hammer” during startup. If you cannot
drain the condensate, open the valve slowly, allowing any trapped condensate to
travel downstream through the flowmeter at low velocity so that no damage occurs.
Saturated Steam
When the process fluid is saturated steam, the electronics housing should be below
the flowmeter body, so that the sensor cavity remains filled when condensate is
present. Filling the sensor cavity with condensate results in a less noisy measurement
caused by any flashing occurring in the flowmeter due to pressure drop.
Insulate your meter as described in Insulation, page 36.
11. Not drawn to scale.
MI 019-224 35
Figure 10 - Piping for Saturated Steam Application
SATURATED STEAM
Superheated Steam
When the process fluid is superheated steam, the electronics housing can be either
above or below the flowmeter body. The flowmeter should be insulated to maintain
superheated conditions inside the flowmeter as well as insulating the electronics from
heat. Assure that the electronics temperature does not exceed 80°C (176°F) under all
flow and environmental conditions.
Insulate your meter as described in Insulation, page 36.
Insulation
The flowtube may be insulated up to the interface between the bonnet pad and the
bonnet. No insulation is allowed beyond the bonnet pad. It is particularly important to
insulate the flowtube on applications for saturated and superheated steam.
Figure 11 - Insulation
BONNET PAD
BONNET
INSULATION
36 MI 019-224
Vibration
The vortex shedder axis should be oriented to reduce or, if possible, virtually eliminate
vibration influence. Position the flowmeter so that the sensor axis is perpendicular to
the direction of the vibration.
Figure 12 - Sensor Mounting to Minimize the Effect of Vibration
SENS Not Good

OR
AXIS
VIBR
ATION
SENS
OR
VIBR AXIS Good
ATIO
N
Ambient Temperature Limitations and Considerations

The temperature limits of the electronics housing are -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)
with an optional display, or -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F) without the optional
display. When installing the flowmeter, consider ambient temperature and proximity to
other heat sources. For extended high temperature applications, this may require
positioning the electronics housing to the side or bottom, and/or insulating pipes to
ensure that the temperature limit is not exceeded. The maximum temperature rating of
80°C (176°F) is a requirement for many agency certifications.12
In installations where these agency certifications do not apply and ambient
temperature limitations are not achievable, remotely mounting the electronics in a
lower temperature area is recommended. In this configuration, only the preamplifier —
which is rated for a maximum temperature of 105°C (221°F) — is near the flowmeter.
12. The 80°C (176°C) temperature is extended to 85°C (185°F) with certain electrical certifications. Refer to Electrical Certifications, page 27.
MI 019-224 37
Recommended Mounting Arrangements

The diagrams in the following table show flanged connections; however, these
mounting arrangements apply to other connection types as well.
Table 28 - Mounting Arrangements
Flowmeter Orientation for: Liquid Gas Saturated Superheated

Steam Steam
Housing Yes13 Yes No Yes14
above pipe
Housing below Yes15 16 Yes16 Yes14 Yes14

pipe
Housing to Yes Yes No Yes14

side of pipe
Housing to Yes Yes No Yes14

side and below
pipe
Vertical pipe, Yes Yes No Yes14

upward flow
Vertical pipe, Yes17 Yes No Yes14

downward flow
13. Possibility of temporary startup error due to trapped air.

14. Requires adequate insulation.
15. Best choice when errors due to startup cannot be tolerated.
16. Recommended only for clean fluids.
17. Not preferred; must maintain full pipe with no voids in fluid.
38 MI 019-224
Meter Servicing
When you install the meter, consider meter repair. The meter should be accessible for
servicing. For installations where the flow cannot be interrupted, depressurized, or
drained, a flowmeter with an isolation valve is required.
Common practice is to install bypass piping so that the entire meter can be removed
for servicing (see figure).
Figure 13 - Typical Piping Configuration
30 PIPE DIAMETERS 5 PIPE

RECOMMENDED. DIAMETERS
RECOMMENDED
SHUTOFF VALVES
Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps

The inside of the pipe at the pressure and temperature taps must be free of burrs and
obstructions.
Figure 14 - Pressure and Temperature Tap Locations
PRESSURE TAP
(3.5 - 4.5 PDs)
TEMPERATURE TAP
DIRECTION OF FLOW 5 - 6 PDs
Pressure Taps
For density measurement (when required), locate the tap 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 pipe
diameters downstream of the flowmeter. See Pressure and Temperature Tap
Locations, page 39.
• On a gas flow installation, the pressure tap should be located on the top of the
pipe.
• On a liquid installation, the pressure tap (if required) should be located on the
side of the pipe.
MI 019-224 39
• On a steam installation, the pressure tap should be located on the top when the
pressure measuring device (typically a pressure transmitter) is above the
pipeline, and on the side when the measuring device is below the pipeline.
• With vertical piping, the pressure tap can be located anywhere around the
circumference of the pipeline.
Temperature Taps
For temperature measurement (when required), locate the tap 5 to 6 pipe diameters
downstream of the flowmeter. To reduce flow disturbance, use the smallest possible
probe. See Pressure and Temperature Tap Locations, page 39.
NOTE: With Multivariable Selection T, the flowmeter offers an integrated
temperature measurement.
Installing the Flowmeter Body

If the electronics are mounted remotely, mount the flowmeter body so that the junction
box is serviceable.
The arrow on the body of the flowmeter indicates the direction of the flow. When
installing the flowmeter, be sure the arrow on the flowmeter points in the direction of
the flow.
NOTE: Ground the flowmeter housing for proper operation and peak
performance.
Flanged Body (84CF)

Figure 15 - Flanged Flowmeter Installation
GASKET
GASKET
FLOWMETER
NOTE: The arrow on the flowmeter body must

point in the direction of the flow.
40 MI 019-224
1. Insert gaskets between the body of the flowmeter and the adjacent flanges.
Position the gaskets so that the inside diameter of each gasket is centered on the
inside diameter of the flowmeter and adjacent piping.
• User-supplied gaskets are required. Select a gasket material suitable for the
process fluid.
• Gaskets do not prevent flanges from being wetted by process fluids.
• If you are welding flanges to the process piping, protect the inside of the
flowmeter from weld splatter, which can affect flowmeter accuracy. Install a
solid sheet of gasketing at each end of the meter during welding. After
welding, remove this sheet and install the flange gaskets.
NOTICE
REDUCED PERFORMANCE
Verify that the internal diameter of the gaskets is larger than that of the flowtube
bore and pipe. Also verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the meter
entrance or exit. Protrusion into the flowstream has an adverse effect on
performance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance.
2. Visually inspect the centering and alignment of the mating flanges.

3. Install the bolts. Tighten in accordance with conventional flange bolt tightening
practice (that is, incremental and alternate tightening of bolts).
MI 019-224 41
Wafer Body (84CW)

For optimal performance, the wafer body flowmeter should be centered with respect to
the adjoining pipe. Normally, this requires the use of centering fixtures that are
supplied with the meter.
Centering fixtures are not required with ANSI Class 150 flanges.
Figure 16 - Centering a Wafer Flowmeter with Spacers
GASKET
FLOWMETER
GASKET
GASKET
HEX NUT ALIGNMENT DEVICE*
2 HEX NUT SPACERS PER SIDE*
* Not required with ANSI Class 150 Flanges; the flowmeter is centered by the bolts alone.
NOTE: The arrow on the flowmeter body must point in the direction of the flow.
1. See Centering a Wafer Flowmeter with Spacers, page 42. Insert the first stud
through the downstream flange at one of the lower holes, through the two hex-nut
spacers, and then through the upstream flange. Place the nuts on both ends of
the stud, but do not tighten.
Using the remaining hex-nut spacers, repeat this step at the lower hole next to
the first.
2. Set the flowmeter between the flanges. Then, rotate spacers to the thickness that
centers the meter.
By rotating the hex-nut spacers to the correct thickness, you can center the meter
to any type of flange.
42 MI 019-224
3. Insert gaskets between the body of the flowmeter and the adjacent flanges.
Position the gaskets so that the inside diameter of each gasket is centered on the
inside diameter of the flowmeter and adjacent piping.
• User-supplied gaskets are required. Select a gasket material suitable for the
process fluid.
• Gaskets do not prevent flanges from being wetted by process fluids.
• If you are welding flanges to the process piping, protect the inside of the
flowmeter from weld splatter, which can affect flowmeter accuracy. Install a
solid sheet of gasketing at each end of the meter during welding. After
welding, remove this sheet and install the flange gaskets.
NOTICE
REDUCED PERFORMANCE
Verify that the internal diameter of the gaskets is larger than that of the flowtube
bore and pipe. Also verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the meter
entrance or exit. Protrusion into the flowstream has an adverse effect on
performance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance.
4. Visually inspect the centering and alignment of the mating flanges.

If the adjoining flanges are misaligned, align the wafer body flowmeter with the
upstream flange.
5. Install the rest of the studs and nuts. Tighten in accordance with conventional
flange bolt tightening practice (that is, incremental and alternate tightening of
bolts).
NPT Body (84CN)

1. Apply process-compatible thread sealant to the flowtube’s threaded end
connection.
2. Secure the threaded pipe adapter to the flowtube’s threaded end connection.
3. Secure the pipeline end of the adapter to the pipeline.
MI 019-224 43
Sanitary Body (84CS)

Piping Considerations for Sanitary Flowmeters
NOTE:
• Prior to installation, spring back the piping on either end of the flowmeter to
allow as much space as is required to install the flowmeter without damaging
the flowmeter body ends.
• Mating end connection parts (clamps, connections, and gaskets) are required
and are supplied by the user. Select a gasket or seal material which is
suitable for the process liquid.
• Firmly secure the cable that connects the flowmeter body to the electronics
housing. The support should be approximately 30 cm (12 in) from the
flowmeter body as shown in the figure. A loose cable may cause wear at the
cable connection and result in signal noise. The temperature limit of the cable
is 105°C (220°F). Do not support the cable on a surface exceeding this
temperature.
Figure 17 - Flowmeter Body Cable Support
APPROXIMATELY
30 cm (12 in)
Effects of Piping on Sanitary Flowmeter Performance

• The vortex shedder axis can be oriented to reduce, or in some cases eliminate,
vibration influence. Positioning the flowmeter body so that vibrations are parallel
to the sensor diaphragms minimizes the effects of vibrations.
44 MI 019-224
• To help ensure that your flowmeter performs to its fullest capabilities, it should be
mounted in a straight, unobstructed pipe. The recommended minimum amount of
straight pipe upstream is shown in the table. There should be a minimum of eight
diameters of straight pipe downstream. See the figure.
Table 29 - Typical Piping Configurations
Recommended Upstream Pipe

Upstream Configuration Diameters
90º Elbow 30
Two elbows in different planes with the closet elbow in the 45
same plane as the shedder element.18
Two elbows in different planes with the closest elbow 35

perpendicular to the plane of the shedder.18
15:1 reduction in piping diameter. 35
Butterfly valve (wide open) 30
Figure 18 - Bypass Piping
8 PIPE
DIAMETERS
SEE TABLE
SHUTOFF VALVES
• It is recommended that control valves, when required, be mounted downstream

from the flowmeter body to help ensure that back pressure is sufficient to
maintain a full pipe, and to help prevent pressure loss sufficient to cause flashing
or cavitation. Verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the pipe line.
• The piping which attaches to the flowmeter body end connections must be rigidly
supported. This minimizes the effects of piping vibration on flowmeter
performance.
• The flowmeter should not be located near pump discharge line or suction lines.
Pumps often produce oscillatory flow which may affect vortex shedding or
produce pipe vibration.
• Flowmeters mounted near the discharge of liquid positive displacement pumps
may experience severe flow fluctuations and cause damage to the sensor.
• Good piping practice is to assume that for four pipe diameters upstream and two
pipe diameters downstream, the internal surface of the pipe shall be free from mill
scale, pits, holes, reaming scores, rifling, bumps, or other irregularities.
18. The shedder is located in the bore of the flowmeter.
MI 019-224 45
Bypass Piping
It is sometimes desirable to provide bypass piping if the flow cannot be interrupted for
servicing the flowmeter. see Bypass Piping, page 45.
WARNING
RISK OF HIGH PRESSURE
If you use a bypass, you must also incorporate some means to relieve the pressure
from the main line before you loosen the vortex flange bolts or clamps.
equipment damage.
Installing the Flowmeter with Sanitary End Connections

The 84C with sanitary body has the following end connection choices:
• 3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent) (Code C0)
• 3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent) (Code T0)
The end connections on your flowmeter body were specified as part of your order. All
end connections are welded to the flowmeter body. You supply the mating end
connections, gaskets, and clamps.
WARNING
RISK OF HIGH PRESSURE
The maximum pressure limit of the flowmeter is 1.9 MPa (275 psig) or the limit of
the end connection used, whichever is less.
equipment damage.
3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent) (Code C0)

The 3-A I-Line fitting mates with Cherry Burrell 15 WI or equivalent.
Figure 19 - 3-A I-Line Fitting
1. Insert the seals into the flowmeter body ends.
46 MI 019-224
2. Insert the mating pipe ends and tighten the clamps securely.
3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent) (Code T0)

The 3-A Tri-Clamp Quick-Disconnect Ferrule mates with a Tri-Clover 14 WMP or
equivalent.
Figure 20 - 3-A Fitting Tri-Clamp
1. Insert the seal into the flowmeter body ends.

2. Make full face contact between the pipe and flowmeter body ends prior to
installing and tightening the clamps.
Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing

The remote electronics housing allows for separation of the flowmeter body from the
electronics. All flowmeters can be remotely mounted. The sanitary flowmeter is only
available with a remote mounted electronics housing with a 4.5 m (15 ft) cable.
A flowmeter with remote electronics consists of:
• An electronics housing mounted to a pipe or wall mounting bracket with up to
15 m (50 ft) of interconnecting cable attached.
• A flowmeter body with a junction box.
1/2 NPT or M20 conduit connections are provided on both the housing and the
junction box.
The remote electronics housing can be mounted to a vertical or horizontal DN 50 or
2 in pipe using the mounting bracket and U-bolt supplied. To mount the housing to a
horizontal pipe, turn the U-bolt 90 degrees from the position shown in the diagram.
MI 019-224 47
Figure 21 - Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing
HOUSING
TERMINALS
FIELD
MOUNTING
BRACKET
JAM NUT CABLE TO
JUNCTION
BOX
U-BOLT
Surface Mounting
NOTE: Ground the flowmeter housing for proper operation and peak
performance.
The housing can be surface mounted by securing the mounting bracket to a wall using
the bracket mounting holes. It may be easier to secure the mounting bracket to the
wall without the housing attached. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the jam nut under the bracket.
2. Raise the housing until you can slide the cable through the cutout in the bracket.
3. Lay the housing aside and secure the mounting bracket to the wall.
4. Place the housing in the bracket.
5. Tighten the jam nut under the bracket.
Cover Locks
Electronic housing cover locks are provided as standard with certain agency
certifications.
To lock the covers:
1. Unscrew the locking pin until approximately 6 mm (0.25 in) shows, lining up the
hole in the pin with the hole in the housing.
2. Insert the seal wire through the two holes, slide the seal onto the wire ends, and
crimp the seal.
48 MI 019-224
Figure 22 - Cover Locks
COVER LOCK (2)

(IF PRESENT)
Positioning the Display

You can rotate the optional display within the housing to any of four positions at 90°
increments. To do this, loosen the two captive screws, turn the display to the desired
position, and retighten the screws.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL CABLE DAMAGE
• Do not turn the display more than 180° in either direction. Doing so can damage
its connecting cable.
• Carefully fold the ribbon cable in the space between the display and the
electronics module so that it is not pinched. The display molding should rest
firmly against the module molding before you tighten the screws.
Setting the Write Protect Jumper

Your flowmeter has write protection capability which meets the requirements of
ISA-S84.01-1986 for use in safety shutdown systems. This means that the local
display and remote electronics can be prevented from writing to the electronics.
NOTE: Even when the flowmeter is write-enabled, you can limit writing to certain
functions by setting passwords. See Using Passwords, page 96.
To activate write protection:
1. Remove the display.
2. Remove the jumper.
3. Place the jumper in the “protect” position. Refer to the diagram.
NOTE: Removing the jumper activates write protection. The “protect” position
is simply a place to store the jumper when it is not in use.
4. To cancel write protection and enable writing, return the jumper to the “write”
position.
MI 019-224 49
Figure 23 - Write Protect Jumper
JUMPER IN JUMPER IN
PROTECT WRITE
POSITION POSITION
WRITE PROTECTION PINS
Positioning the Housing

You can rotate the flowmeter housing up to one full turn in the counterclockwise
direction (when viewed from above) for optimal access to adjustments, display, and
conduit connections. The housing has a retention clip that prevents rotating the
housing beyond a safe depth of housing/sensor thread engagement.
Figure 24 - Housing Retention Clip Location
RETENTION CLIP
HOUSING
RETENTION CLIP
CUP
CLIP
Electrical Installation
Field Termination Wiring
The installation and wiring of your flowmeter must conform to local code requirements.
Also, for FM and CSA installations, refer to MI 019-177; for ATEX and IECEx
installations, refer to MI 019-179.
NOTICE
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT OR SURGE
Use transient/surge protection in installations prone to unusually high levels of
electrical transients and surges.
50 MI 019-224
Conduit/Cable Gland Connections

The electronics housing has two conduit/cable gland connections to allow access
from either side of the housing. These connections are 1/2 NPT or M20 threads per
your order. Use the correct threaded devices when making these connections. You
can verify the type of thread with the ninth character after the dash in the model code
on the data plate. The letters T or R indicate a 1/2 NPT thread; V or W, an M20 thread.
Refer to “Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing” in Model Code,
page 196.
The housing comes with an agency-approved threaded metal plug in one of the
conduit holes and a plastic plug in the other. After you connect the conduit or cable
gland, plug the unused hole with the metal plug.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
To help prevent explosions and to maintain flameproof, explosionproof, and dust-
ignitionproof protection, observe applicable wiring practices. Plug the unused
conduit openings with approved conduit plugs. Both plug and conduit must engage
a minimum of five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; eight full threads for M20
connections.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
Accessing Flowmeter Field Terminals

For access to the field terminals, remove the cover from the field terminals
compartment.
Figure 25 - Accessing Field Terminals

1/2 NPT OR M20 CONDUIT CONNECTION FOR
CUSTOMER WIRING. ONE ON OPPOSITE SIDE ALSO.
PLUG UNUSED OPENING WITH THE METAL PLUG
PROVIDED OR EQUIVALENT.
REMOVE COVER TO ACCESS

WIRING TERMINALS
EXTERNAL GROUND
MI 019-224 51
Figure 26 - Identification of Field Terminals
MODBUS
TERMINALS
GROUND SCREW
(EXTERNAL TO THE
TERMINAL BLOCK) S
B- A+
B- S A+
−
2
+
+
2
PULSE
PE OUTPUT
POWER
1
TERMINALS
−
TERMINALS
1
+
PE
PE
GROUND
NOTE: The terminal markings vary on different receivers (RTUs, modems).

• If the terminals on the receiver are marked only + and –, use the
corresponding designations on the transmitter.
• If the terminals on the receiver are marked only A and B, use the
corresponding designations on the transmitter.
• If the terminals on the receiver are marked both A/B and +/–, but A is – and B
is + (different than the transmitter), use the +/– designations on the
transmitter and disregard the A and B markings.
Remotely Mounted Electronics

To use the flowmeter as shipped with the cable attached at both ends, mount the
electronics housing and flowmeter body within the limits of the cable length.
If the cable must be disconnected (to shorten the cable, run the cable through conduit,
or for some other reason), you must disconnect the cable at the flowmeter (junction
box) end. You cannot disconnect the cable at the electronics housing end because it
has been epoxied into the metal connector. It is labeled: “Factory Sealed / Electronics
End / Do Not Remove.”
Preparing the Remote Signal Cable

If the cable must be shortened or re-terminated, prepare the flowmeter (junction box)
end of the cable.
52 MI 019-224
1. Insert the cable into the knurled nut and rubber grommet. Then remove the outer
insulation to the dimension shown. Do not damage the copper braid.
8.5±1/8"
2. Cut the copper braid one inch from the end of the outer insulation.
Copper braid Metallized mylar film
Outer clear wrapping
1"
3. Insert the cable into the fitting until the cable is bottomed out inside the fitting.
Rotate the fitting one or two turns to pack the braid into place. Remove the cable
and examine the packed braid. If there are still strands of braid that have not
packed, push them back by hand and reinsert the cable into the fitting. Remove
the cable and examine the braid. It should be compressed to a length of
approximately 3/8 to 1/2 inch.
Compressed copper braid Fitting
Rubber grommet
4. Remove the outer clear wrapping and the metallized mylar film to the end of the
packed braid. This exposes the inner drain wire. The inner clear wrapping and
filler material are still in place.
3/8" to 1/2" Outer clear
wrapping
Metallized mylar film
5. Make sure that the drain wire is not in contact with the outer braid, then use an
ohm meter to verify that there is no electrical connection between the drain wire
and the braid over the entire length of the cable. This step also verifies that the
electronics end of the cable has been properly dressed, and that there is no
damage or other issue with the cable.
Drain wire
Inner clear wrapping
6. Fold the drain wire back onto the packed wire braid and wrap it around one full
turn. Then cut off the remainder of the drain wire.
Drain wire folded back, wrapped
once around, and trimmed
MI 019-224 53
7. Cut back the inner clear wrapping and the filler to 1/2 to 5/8 inch from the end of
the outer insulation.
Twisted pair
1/2" to 5/8"
8. Cut a half-inch long piece of shrink wrap. Position it so that half the wrap covers
the inner clear wrapping/filler, and half covers the exposed twisted wires. Apply
heat to the shrink wrap.
NOTE: You can use a half-inch piece of electrical tape in place of the shrink
wrap.
1/2"
Shrink wrap or
electrical tape
9. Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of the wires.

Knurled nut
Number of wires may vary
1/4"
Connecting the Remote Signal Cable

After the cable end is prepared, connect the cable to the junction box..
1. Insert the cable into the fitting, making sure that the cable has bottomed out in the
fitting.
2. Slide the rubber grommet into the fitting.
3. Screw the knurled nut into place, clamping the rubber grommet against the
assembly. Hand tighten with moderate force to assure a water tight connection.
4. Dress the wires in the junction box as shown in the diagram.
Figure 27 - Connection of Remote Signal Cable (Junction Box End)
Y
O
R B
B Y
Knurled nut and

rubber grommet
R
V R
R/W N
G N
W
54 MI 019-224
Installation with Conduit

The remote signal cable is shipped with the cable attached at both ends. To run the
cable through conduit, the Mounting/Conduit Openings For Electronic Housing -T
option must have been purchased. This option facilitates a standard 1/2 NPT conduit
connection at both the housing end and the flowmeter end.
1. Disconnect the cable at the flowmeter (junction box) end.
2. Slide the remote conduit adapter (part number K0149LE), longer end first, up the
cable and attach it at the housing end.
3. Slide the conduit and fittings over the cable.
4. Slide a second remote conduit adapter, shorter end first, onto the cable and
attach it at the junction box end.
Explosionproof or Flameproof Certifications

The remote cable provides an explosionproof/flameproof connection at the electronics
end. Explosionproof connections beyond this point are not required. See the diagram
for installation guidelines for explosionproof or flameproof certifications.
Figure 28 - Installation of Remote Model 84C with Explosionproof or Flameproof Certification
NEGATIVE TERMINAL
LOOP MUST BE GROUNDED
TO EARTH
GND
+ – –
POWER
SUPPLY
– + +
REMOTE FLOWTUBE
PE
PE GROUND
THE PE GROUND WIRE MUST HAVE LESS THAN 1 Ω

OF RESISTANCE FROM THE FARTHEST BARRIER TO
THE MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE
Loop Wiring
Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply
1. Remove the cover from the field terminals compartment.
MI 019-224 55
2. Run signal wires through one of the flowmeter’s conduit connections. (Do not run
flowmeter wires in the same conduit as the mains/ac power wires.)
• Twisted pair helps protect the remote communications from electrical noise.
• Typical signal wires are 0.50 mm2 (20 AWG).
• The maximum recommended length for signal wires is 1,800 m (6,000 ft).
3. If you use shielded cable, ground the shield at the negative terminal of the power
supply only. Do not ground the shield at the flowmeter.
4. Plug unused conduit openings.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
To help prevent explosions and to maintain flameproof, explosionproof, and
dust-ignitionproof protection, observe applicable wiring practices. Plug the
unused conduit openings with approved conduit plugs. Both plug and conduit
must engage a minimum of five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; eight full
threads for M20 connections.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
5. The flowmeter is equipped with both an internal and an external ground

connection. Connect a ground wire to either terminal in accordance with local
practice.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL REDUCED PERFORMANCE OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
If the signal circuit must be grounded, it is preferable to ground it at the
negative terminal of the dc power supply. To avoid errors resulting from ground
loops or the possibility of short-circuiting groups of instruments in a loop, there
should be only one ground in a loop.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance or
equipment damage.
6. Connect the power supply loop wires to the “+” and “–” terminals.
7. Connect receivers (such as controllers, recorders, or indicators) to the A(+), S
(shield), and B(-) terminals.
8. Install the cover onto the flowmeter. Turn the cover to seat the o-ring into the
housing. Continue to hand-tighten until the cover contacts the housing metal-to-
metal. If cover locks are present, refer to Cover Locks, page 48.
9. To wire additional flowmeters to the same power supply, repeat these steps for
each flowmeter.
56 MI 019-224
Figure 29 - Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply
RECEIVER
S
INTERNAL
GROUND
TERMINAL
S
B- A+
POWER
SUPPLY 2
+
PE
− 1
OPTIONAL
PE
SHIELDED
WIRE
OPTIONAL GROUND PE GROUND
EXTERNAL REQUIRED FOR
GROUND EXPLOSIONPROOF
TERMINAL (FLAMEPROOF)
APPLICATIONS
Wiring a Flowmeter with a Pulse Output

See Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply, page 55 for an overview of wiring,
grounding, voltage, and resistance requirements.
An additional, separate loop is required when using the pulse output. Each loop
requires its own power supply.
The maximum pulse output current is 20 mA. Use a load resistor that is sized
accordingly. An 1000 ohm load resistor is shown as an example in the diagram.
Figure 30 - Wiring a Flowmeter with Pulse Output
TO RECEIVER INTERNAL
GROUND
TERMINAL
POWER
COUNTER
SUPPLY
S
TO LOOP POWER B- A+
2
+
PE
− 1
OPTIONAL
PE GROUND REQUIRED PE GROUND
FOR EXPLOSIONPROOF
(FLAMEPROOF)
APPLICATIONS
EXTERNAL OPTIONAL
1000 OHM LOAD SHIELDED
GROUND
TERMINAL RESISTOR FOR PULSE WIRE
OUTPUT CURRENT
NOTE: “2” TERMINAL IS NEGATIVE (-)
“1” TERMINAL IS POSITIVE (+)
MI 019-224 57
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Operating the Flowmeter
Operating the Flowmeter

You can operate the flowmeter with the optional local display, Modbus host software,
or a PC-based configurator and the DTM.
The specifics of each communication method are provided as follows:
• Using the flowmeter with the Optional Local Display (see Using the Local Display,
page 95)
• Using the flowmeter with Modbus Commands (see Modbus RTU Operation, page
143)
• Using the flowmeter with a PC-based configurator (see the manual for the PC-
based configurator and MI 019-276, Advanced DTM Library - Operation Using
MODBUS Communications Protocol)
NOTE: The names or organization of the options available vary between the
different communication methods, but the functions are the same.
Personalities
You can select a personality for the flowmeter. The purpose of a personality is to
preconfigure and simplify (or limit) some of the flowmeter settings and measurements
available for a specific user application or set of applications. Measurement
generation, configuration setting options, and behaviors available may be different
depending on the personality selected.
If you specify the personality to be used when you purchase your flowmeter, it will be
preconfigured at the factory with that selected personality.
NOTE: It is possible to change the personality that was preconfigured at the
factory. See Setting Advanced Options, page 86.
The following personalities are available:
• The General personality provides all the possible functions and settings. This is
the most unrestricted personality. It can be used for all user defined fluids and
Model Code options.
• The Steam personality is targeted to applications for steam flow. The fluid
selection in this personality is limited to saturated steam or superheated steam.
When using the Steam personality, the alert behavior of the flowmeter is modified
to allow configuration of an Upper Range Value (URV) for the Mass Flow
measurement based on the nominal operating region of the Steam fluid (even if
the current operating temperature is at room temperature, rather than in the
Steam region). In this case, you can set the URV and a “NoSteam?” message will
be alternately flashed on the third line of the local display.
Additionally, the Base Volume measurement is not displayed or active when using
the Steam personality, as it is not relevant to Steam flow. The Steam personality
can be used with all Model Code options.
58 MI 019-224
Operating the Flowmeter Model 84C with Modbus Communication
• The Oil & Gas personality is targeted to simplify configuration for the
measurement of flow in oil and gas applications. When using the Oil & Gas
personality, a limited set of EGUs is available and easy-to-use menus are
provided. The Oil & Gas personality supports a single totalizer labeled “Total”
which is always mapped to Volumetric flow. The Total EGU follows the Volume
Rate EGU (for example, bbl/d results in a total of barrels).
There is no user configuration for the single totalizer, Total. You can start, stop, or
clear Total from the local display or a Modbus command.
Additionally, if pulse output is available, it is mapped to Volumetric flow and
preconfigured for Frequency mode using the user liquid upper range limit of the
meter for limiting the maximum pulse output frequency. Like the totalizer, the
pulse output is always On when the meter is online; and the only user
configuration is the Pulse Per Unit Factor, which you can set from the local
display or a Modbus command.
The reduced EGU list for the Oil & Gas personality is:
gal/m gallons per minute
bbl/h barrels per hour
bbl/d barrels per day
m3/s meters cubed per second
m3/d meter cubed per day
Although there are other options available in the menus, you typically need to
configure only the Flowmeter EGU and the Pulse per Unit Factor when using the
Oil & Gas personality.
The Oil & Gas personality can be used with all Model Code options.
If you change the personality of the flowmeter, the parameters are automatically set to
the default values for the new personality. The table below lists the default parameter
values for each personality.
Table 30 - Default Parameter Values for Personalities
Parameter Name General Personality Steam Personality Oil & Gas Personality
Adaptive Filter enable Enabled (normal setting) FixedGas setting
LFCI Level 4 5
Calculation Method=User On; Calculation Method=User On;
Volume Rate Configuration no change
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad
Volume Rate Unit no change bbl/d (barrels/day)
Measurement Damping 2 seconds 0 seconds
Calculation Method=User On;

Base Volume Configuration n/a no change
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
Calculation Method is based on Model Code: UserOn if RTD is present;

Temperature Configuration
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad

Density Configuration
Fluid Identifier User Liquid Saturated Steam User Liquid
Fluid Material Name Default Water Default Steam Default Water

Mass Flow Configuration
no change
Velocity Configuration Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
no change
Viscosity Configuration
MI 019-224 59
Table 30 - Default Parameter Values for Personalities (Continued)
Parameter Name General Personality Steam Personality Oil & Gas Personality
Calculation Method=User On; Calculation Method=User On;

Pulse Output Configuration Alert Strategy=OnAlert Use Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
Default
Pulse Output Mode None Freq
Pulse Output Mapped

Volume Rate Volume Rate
Source no change
Pulse Output Upper Range
1000Hz 350Hz
Value
Pulse Output Default
Frequency 0Hz 0Hz
Pulse Output Factor 1 3.79E-05
Pulse Output Pulse Mode

Mapped Source Volume Flow Rate Volume Flow Rate
Pulse Output Pulse Mode gallons

Factor EGU
no change
0 n/a
Default Value
1
Units/Pulse Factor
Total 1 Configuration Total Off, cleared
Total 2 Configuration Total Off, cleared Total Off, cleared

unavailable
Total 3 Configuration
Total 1 Units kg
Total 2 Units no change bbl (barrels)

m3
Total 3 Units
Total 1 Mapped Source Mass Flow Rate
Total 2 Mapped Source no change Volume Flow Rate

Volume Flow Rate
Total 3 Mapped Source
Personality General Steam Oil&Gas
Noise Reduction Mode Method1 Method1 Method1

Enthalpy Configuration
Heat Content Configuration
Flowmeter Functions and Actions

You can perform the following functions and actions on the flowmeter.
• Measurement - The normal operating mode of the flowmeter where you can
display real-time flowmeter measurements. The display indicates whether
diagnostic conditions exist, and displays rollover counter values for totalizers 1, 2,
and 3. The selected default measurement is displayed when the transmitter is
turned on. (See Measurement, page 96.)
• Status - Provides the status of various parameters, write protection (local display
only), and any diagnostic messages.
60 MI 019-224
• Setup - Used to set up (configure) the flowmeter for your application. This
includes defining fluid, flow, tuning, total output, piping, tags, flowtube, and
password parameters. Depending on the Personality selected, the setup
parameters may be limited.
• Calibration/Test - Used to perform several calibration and test functions on the
flowmeter.
• Pulse Actions (available only if Pulse Output is configured for Pulse Mode) -
Used to control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the total
flow value. Also allows you to select whether or not the flowmeter is actively
accumulating values and transmitting pulse signals.
• Totalizer Actions - The flowmeter has three separate totalizers that accumulate
flow measurement to keep track of amounts of flow. (For the Oil & Gas
personality, there is only a single totalizer.) Each totalizer can be mapped
independently to keep track of different measurements. The Totalizer functions
are used to control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the
total flow value.
Status
Status functions include:
• Measurement Status - Allows you to review the units, value, and status of the
system parameters and thus assess the performance of the loop. You cannot edit
parameters from this function.
• Write Protection (local display only) - Allows you to view whether write protection
is enabled or disabled.
• Diagnostic Messages and Alerts - Shows diagnostic messages and alerts
generated by the flowmeter.
• Reason Codes - Shows messages in hexadecimal format used by Global
Customer Support to diagnose issues.
• Software Revisions - Shows the software revision currently running in the
flowmeter.
• Time in Service Meter - Shows the values of the Time in Service meter for the
flowmeter. Two values are displayed:
◦ Primary - The number of days the flowmeter has been powered up over its
lifetime.
◦ User - The number of days the flowmeter has been powered up since the last
reset.
See the Status Menu Diagram, page 104 for the menu on the local display for the
General and Steam personalities and see the Status Menu Diagram, page 134 for the
menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality.
The status values associated with the diagnostic messages are shown in Messages,
page 91.
Setup
Setup enables you to configure your fluid, tuning, totalizer, measurement, output,
pipe, tag, and flowtube parameters. It also enables you to reset the flowmeter back to
factory defaults. When using the local display, Setup functions can be password
protected. You can establish and change your passwords from the Setup menu. See
Using Passwords, page 96.
MI 019-224 61
For easy configuration of your Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter, it is recommended that
you configure the flowmeter in the sequence described in Recommended Setup
Procedure, page 63.
When you are configuring the flowmeter using the local display, you are asked to
confirm that your control loop is in manual mode. Verify that your control system is in
manual mode before proceeding beyond this prompt. Once you confirm the prompt,
the flowmeter enters offline mode with no output.
NOTE: When in offline mode, all outputs stop and all configured totalizers stop
accumulating. A totalizer alert is generated.
When configuring the flowmeter using Modbus commands, the flowmeter does not
switch to offline mode for configuration. All configuration changes are made when the
flowmeter is operational and the new parameter values become active as soon as
they are set.
The following types of parameters can be configured:
• Fluid
• Tuning
• Measurement
• Totalizer
• Output
• Piping
• Flowtube identification
• Advanced options, including selecting a personality
• Database reset
• Password (local display only). See Using Passwords, page 96.
The configuration parameters available depend on the personality that is enabled.
For convenience, there is a set of measurement parameters that can be configured
from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration menu:
• Flow Temperature
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
Measurement Properties
You configure measurement properties for many of the parameters in the Fluid menu
and the Measurement Configuration menu. The following table defines each of these
measurement properties. See the parameter descriptions for the default values for
each measurement property.
Table 31 - Measurement Properties
Local Display Register19 Description
EGU See Unit Code Registers, Engineering units (EGUs): Select an appropriate engineering unit for each fluid
page 149. measurement type. Refer to Units, page 15.
EGUTYP N/A EGU Type: (For Base Volumetric Flow and the General personality only) Choose
to use the standard or normalized volume for the Base Volume Rate (BVolrate)
measurement parameter.
19. See Registers, page 145.
62 MI 019-224
Table 31 - Measurement Properties (Continued)
Local Display Register20 Description
LRV See Lower Limit Registers, Lower Range Value: Enter the lower range value for the measurement type.
page 148. Some fluid parameters (flow, for example) do not have an LRV option because it
should always be 0.
URV See Upper Limit Registers, Upper Range Value: Enter the upper range value for the measurement type.
page 147.
Default See User Default Default: Enter the default value to which the flowmeter will set the measurement
Registers, page 146 value if an error occurs.
AlertSt See Alert Strategy Alert Strategy: This property allows you to configure how the flowmeter will react
Registers, page 152. to an alert with regard to the measurement you are configuring.
• On Alert Continue (NoAlert): On an alert, the flowmeter continues to run, but
the measurement is set to a clipped lower or upper limit and a status alert is
generated.
• On Alert (AlertBad): On an alert, the output value is set to the upper or lower
hard limit, and a status alert is generated.
• On Alert Use the Default (AlertDef): On an alert, the flowmeter continues to
run, but the measurement is set to a user-defined default.
NOTE:
• Pulse output only supports On Alert Use the Default (AlertDef).
CMethod See Calculation Method Calculation Method: This property describes how the particular measurement is
Registers, page 153. calculated:
• User Def: The measurement always uses a default.
• User On: When the Calculation method is set to User On, the measurement
is calculated by the flowmeter. For example, the flowmeter can correct
density and viscosity of liquids. See Fluid Parameters, page 68.
NOTE: Pressure does not support the UserOn calculation method.
• By Remote: The measurement is transmitted by remote communications.
4 Damp See Damping Registers, Damping: This property allows you to set damping for fluid configuration
page 147. parameters. Possible settings are:
• None, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
Recommended Setup Procedure

Configure your flowmeter in the following sequence:
1. Change the model code if necessary.
Typically, the model code of the flowmeter should not be reset. You reset the
model code only if you are replacing a module with the assistance of Global
Customer Support. However, in the unlikely event that you need to perform this
action, it must be the first step of the configuration process.
2. Determine which personality you want to use and verify that the flowmeter was
preconfigured with the correct personality at the factory. For details on how to
change the personality, see Setting Advanced Options, page 86.
3. Configure the required settings in the order listed below:
a. Fluid type
b. Measurement properties
c. Flowmeter’s output
MI 019-224 63
4. Configure the optional settings in the order listed below:

a. Configure the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI).
b. Map the totalizers.
c. Configure the piping parameters.
d. Configure the reference K-factor.
e. Configure passwords, if applicable.
f. Turn totalizers on.
For a detailed example of how to achieve a pulse output for Mass Flow, and how to
display Total Mass using the local display, see Configuration Example, page 100.
Setting Fluid Parameters

You can configure the following fluid parameters: the fluid type, fluid name (optional),
flowing temperature, base temperature, density, base density, pressure, base
pressure, viscosity, and thermal coefficients for density and velocity.
NOTE: The flowing temperature, density, pressure and viscosity parameters can
be set from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration menu.
Changing the fluid type causes the fluid parameters to be set to default values for that
type:
• Liquid - water at 15°C (59°F ambient)
• Gas - air at 101.00 kPaa (14.65 psia)
• Vapor/Saturated Steam - at 957.34 kPaa (138.85 psia)
NOTE: Changing the fluid type may affect the mapped output you have selected.
Fluid Types
The following fluid types are available for each personality:
• General Personality
◦ User Liquid - Configurable fluid type for user-defined liquids.
◦ User Vapor - Configurable fluid type for user-defined vapors.
◦ User Gas - Configurable fluid type for user-defined gases.
• Steam Personality
◦ Saturated Steam - Non-configurable fluid type for steam in a saturated
condition.
◦ Superheated Steam - Non-configurable fluid type for steam in a super heated
condition.
• Oil & Gas Personality
◦ User Liquid - Configurable fluid type for user-defined liquids.
You can configure User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas. Saturated Steam and
Superheated Stream are predefined (see Default Configuration Databases, page 65).
The following parameters can be set for the user configurable fluid types:
• Thermal Coefficient of Density (ThCoefD)
• Reference Temperature of Density (ThRefTD)
• Reference Density of Liquid (ThRefD)
• Thermal Coefficient of Viscosity (ThCoefV)
64 MI 019-224
• Reference Temperature for Viscosity (ThRefTV))

• Reference Viscosity of Liquid (ThRefV)
These parameters do not appear in the menu tree for predefined fluid types.
Default Configuration Databases

Each flowmeter is shipped with an operating configured database. However, the
flowmeter may not be configured for the actual fluid and flow conditions of your
application.
NOTE: Check the configuration of your flowmeter before start-up.
If information is not supplied with the purchase order, the flowmeter is shipped with the
defaults in the following tables. These defaults are not recommended for general
operation. If no other process information is available, entering User Liquid, User
Vapor, User Gas, SaturatedSteam or SuperHeatedSteam as the fluid type during
configuration establishes the default databases as shown in the following tables.
Table 32 - Default Database for User Liquid
Parameter Metric U.S.

Fluid Type User Liquid (Default Water) User Liquid (Default Water)
Type of Flow Volume Volume
Measurement Units m3/s gal/min
Flowing Temperature 15ºC 159ºF
Flowing Density 999.14 kg/m3 62.37 lb/ft3
Absolute Viscosity 1.14 cP
Upper Range Value Upper Range Limit for Flowmeter Size
Pressure 101.00 kPaa 14.65 psia
Heat Content21 0 Joules/kg 0 BTU/lb
Table 33 - Default Database for User Vapor

Fluid Type User Vapor (Default Steam) User Vapor (Default Steam)
Type of Flow Same as present configuration
Measurement Units Same as present configuration
Flowing Temperature 178ºC 352.4ºF
21. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Liquid.
22. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Vapor.
MI 019-224 65
Table 34 - Default Database for User Gas

Fluid Type User Gas (Default Air) User Gas (Default Air)
Measurement Units Same as present configuration23
Flowing Temperature 20ºC 68ºF
Table 35 - Default Database for Saturated Steam

Fluid Type SaturatedSteam SaturatedSteam
Flowing Density 4.94kg/m3 0.31 lb/ft3
Pressure 957.34kPaa 138.85 psia
Heat Content 2775400.00 Joules/kg 1193207.22 BTU/lb
Table 36 - Default Database for Superheated Steam

Fluid Type SuperHeatedSteam SuperHeatedSteam
Flowing Density 4.94kg/m3 0.31 lb/ft3
Pressure 957.34kPaa 138.85 psia
Heat Content 2775490.25 Joules/kg 1193246.02 BTU/lb
Example: Configuring a User-Defined Fluid

Set up a user-configurable fluid type with the following characteristics:
23. Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable to gas.
24. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Gas.
25. Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable to steam.
66 MI 019-224
ThRefTD (Reference ThRefD (Reference ThCoefD Density

Temperature) Density of the Liquid) (Δ Density/
Δ Temperature)
75 ºF 49.0172 lbs/ft3 -0.034529561 lbs/ft3/ºF 49.0172 lbs/ft3
The following formula calculates the density values for a user defined fluid:
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature – ThRefTD) * ThCoefD
Refer to the diagram.
Figure 31 - Calculating Density Values
Density slope
Temperature
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature – ThRefTD) x slope

where slope = ThCoefD = Δ Density/Δ Temperature
For a detailed example of how to achieve a pulse output for Mass Flow and how to
display Total Mass using the local display, see Configuration Example, page 100.
Updating Fluid Parameters

To update fluid parameters:
1. Configure the parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Fluid menu selection (local
display).
See the Fluid Menu Diagram, page 108 for the menu on the local display for the
General or Steam personalities. The Fluid menu is not available for the Oil & Gas
personality.
2. For the Flow Temperature, Density, Pressure and Viscosity parameters listed
below, configure the properties in Measurement Properties, page 62. Refer to the
menu diagrams for the specific properties that apply to each parameter.
NOTE: For convenience, the following measurement parameters can be
configured from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration
menus:
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
MI 019-224 67
Table 37 - Fluid Parameters
Local Display Register26 Factory Default Description
3 Fluid 6900 (Default value Fluid Type: Select the type of fluid: User Liquid, User Vapor, User
varies based on Gas, SaturatedSteam or SuperHeatedSteam. Default values for
the personality these fluid types are listed in the tables in Default Configuration
selected.) Databases, page 65. User Liquid, User Vapor, and SselectionUser
Gas are user configurable fluid types, while SaturatedSteam and
SuperHeatedSteam are predefined.
Only User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas are available in the
General personality. Only SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam
are available in the Steam personality. The Fluid menu is not available
for the Oil & Gas personality.
3 Name 6902 Default Water Fluid Name: Enter a name for this fluid (optional).
3 Config FlwTmp EGU: 3306 EGU: degF Flow Temperature: Configure the measurement properties associated
with the flow temperature.
LRV: 2402 LRV: N/A
Depending on whether the Vortex flowmeter is configured with an RTD
URV: 2308 URV: N/A for multivariable temperature compensation, this parameter either
displays the temperature of the flowing process material or allows you
Default: 1000 Default: 59 to enter a flow temperature.
AlertSt: 5007 4AlertSt: N/A For a flowmeter with temperature compensation (Multivariable
Selection T), the Flow Temperature shows the temperature of the
CMethod: 5504 CMethod: N/A process material flowing through the Vortex meter. For a flowmeter
without temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection N), enter
Damp: 2004 Damp: None the flow temperature in this parameter in the specified units.
3 BasTmp 7502 59 Base Temperature: Enter the base temperature in the temperature
unit specified.
3 Config Densty EGU: 3310 EGU: lb/ft3 Density: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
density of the fluid.
LRV: 2408 LRV: N/A
If you configure the calculation method to User On, be sure to enter the
URV: 2316 URV: N/A reference density (ThRefD), reference temperature (ThRefTD), and the
thermal coefficient of density (ThCoefD).
Default: 1004 Default: 62.372
If you choose to use a custom density unit, define your custom unit by
AlertSt: 5011 4AlertSt: N/A first entering a Label for your custom unit using up to eight
alphanumeric characters. Then, enter any Offset and a conversion
CMethod: 5508 CMethod: N/A factor (Slope) to convert from kilograms per cubic meter to the custom
unit.
Damp: 2008 Damp: None
3 BasDen 7500 62.372 Base Density: Enter the base density in the density unit specified.
3 Config Press EGU: 3309 EGU: kPaa Pressure: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
pressure of the fluid.
LRV: 2406 LRV: N/A
URV: 2314 URV: N/A
Default: 1002 Default:

100.1010
AlertSt: 5010
4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: 5507
CMethod: N/A
Damp: 2006
Damp: None
3 BasPrs 7504 100.1010 Base Pressure: Enter the base pressure in the unit specified.
3 Config Visc EGU: 3311 EGU: cPoise Viscosity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
viscosity of the fluid.
If you configure the Calculation Method to User On, be sure to enter the
AlertSt: 5012 4AlertSt: N/A reference viscosity (ThRefV), reference temperature (ThRefTV), and
the thermal coefficient of viscosity (ThCoefV).
CMethod: 5509 CMethod: N/A
68 MI 019-224
Table 37 - Fluid Parameters (Continued)
3ThCoefD 7000 -0.0191111 Thermal Coefficient of Density, Reference Temperature of Density,

and Reference Density of Liquid: These parameters apply to
3ThRefTD 7002 58.99996 configurable fluid types only (User Liquid, User Vapor, and User
Gas).
3 ThRefD 7004 62.37183
The Vortex Model 84C Flowmeter uses the following thermo-coefficient
equation to apply temperature correction for density (for liquids only):
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature - ThRefTD) * ThCoefD
See Calculating Density Values, page 67.
where:
• ThRefD is the reference density of the liquid
• ThRefTD is the reference temperature
• ThCoefD = Δ Density / Δ Temperature
3ThCoefV 7100 -0.006316 Thermal Coefficient of Viscosity, Reference Temperature of

Viscosity, and Reference Viscosity of Liquid: These parameters
3ThRefTV 7102 59.99990 apply to configurable fluid types only (User Liquid, User Vapor, and
User Gas).
3 ThRefV 7104 1.121900
Use these parameters only if you expect to have Reynolds Number
Correction turned on and expect to have a Reynolds Number of less
than 20,000. For more information, see Setting Tuning Parameters,
page 69.
The flowmeter uses the following thermo-coefficient equation to apply

temperature correction for viscosity (for liquids only):
Viscosity = ThRefV + (Current Temperature - ThRefTV) * ThCoefV

where:
where:
• ThRefV is the reference viscosity of the liquid
• ThRefTV is the reference temperature
• ThCoefV = Δ Viscosity / Δ Temperature
Setting Tuning Parameters

The Tuning function allows you to turn the Reynolds number correction feature on or
off and set the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI).28
Configure the Tuning parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Tuning menu selection (local
display).
See the Tuning Menu Diagram, page 113 for the menu on the local display for the
General and Steam personalities and see the Tuning Menu Diagram, page 137 for the
menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality.

28. LFCI is also known as Low Flow Cut Off (LFCO).
MI 019-224 69
Table 38 - Tuning Parameters
3 Rd Corr (General Coil 103 (See Coils, Off Reynolds number correction: Set the Reynolds number correction to
and Steam page 162.) On or Off.
personalities only)
3MaxRate (Oil & Gas 2302–2303 The Liquid upper Maximum Flow Rate, same as upper range value.
personality only) range value for
the flow meter.
(line size
dependent)
3MxRt Hz (Oil & Gas 13504–13505 Line size Pulse output frequency that corresponds to the Max Rate flowing rate
personality only) dependent. (3MaxRate).
3 LFCI > 4 FlowEGU 10501 gal/m (for LFCI Flow Units: Set the flow units associated with the LFCI.
General and
Steam
personalitites)
and bbl/d (for Oil
& Gas
personality)
3 LFCI > 4Setting See LFCI Registers, LFCI 4 LFCI Settings: Set the LFCI setting (LFCI 1 through LFCI 8). Higher
page 161. settings reject more noise, but also require a higher flow before flow is
detected.
3 LFCI > 4 LfUFac (Oil 13031–13032 1.0000000 LFCI User Factor per Model 84C Special Flowtube Confgurator.
& Gas personality
only)
3 FlwDmp (Oil & Gas 2002–2003 None Flow Damping Time: Select the damping factor. Choose 0 to 32
personality only) seconds.
3 Filter (Oil & Gas 13501 FixGas Filter Mode: Choices are:
personality only) • Normal: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter Limit = User URV).
• FixGas: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter Limit = Air URL).
• DynGas: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter switches).
• Off: Noise Filter off.
You can also set LFCI automatically. See Calibration and Test, page 87.
Setting Measurement Parameters

If you map output to anything other than Flow Temperature and then change fluid
parameters, the output may be affected. Check the measurement configuration
settings for all mapped measurements.
Updating Measurement Parameters

To update measurement parameters:
1. Navigate to the 1 Setup > 2Measure > 3MeasCfg menu selection (local display)
and configure flow damping. Choose from None, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 (factory default),
4, 8, 16, or 32.
Flow damping is applied to volumetric flow, mass flow, and heat flow
measurements. Flow damping does not apply to Raw measurements.
29. See Registers, page 145 and Coils, page 162.
70 MI 019-224
2. Configure the other measurement parameters below from the 1 Setup >
2Measure > 3MeasCfg menu selection (local display).
See the Measurement Configuration Menu Diagram, page 114 for the menu on
the local display for the General or Steam personality and see the Oil Gas Main
Menu, page 136 for the menus on the local display for the Oil and Gas
personality.
For each parameter listed below, configure the properties provided in
Measurement Properties, page 62. Refer to the menu diagrams for the specific
properties that apply to each parameter.
NOTE: For convenience, the following measurement parameters can be
configured from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration
menus:
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
Table 39 - Measurement Parameters
4 Config FlwVol EGU: 3303 EGU: gal/m Flow Volume: Configure the measurement properties associated with
the volumetric flow.
URV: 2302 URV: N/A
AlertSt: 5004 Default: 0
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config FlwBVo (Not EGU: 3304 EGUTYP: StdVol Base Volumetric Flow: Configure the measurement properties
available in Steam associated with the base volumetric flow.
personality) URV: 2304 EGU: Sgal/m
AlertSt: 5005 URV: N/A
Default: 0
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config Press EGU: 3309 EGU: kPaa Pressure: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
pressure of the fluid.
LRV: 2406 LRV: N/A
URV: 2314 URV: N/A
Default: 1002 Default:

100.1010
AlertSt: 5010
4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: 5507
CMethod: N/A
Damp: 2006
Damp: None
4 Config FlwTmp EGU: 3306 EGU: degF Flow Temperature: Configure the measurement properties associated
with the flow temperature.
LRV: 2402 LRV: N/A
Depending on whether the Vortex flowmeter is configured with an RTD
URV: 2308 URV: N/A for multivariable temperature compensation, this parameter either
displays the temperature of the flowing process material or allows you
Default: 1000 Default: 59 to enter a flow temperature.
AlertSt: 5007 4AlertSt: N/A For a flowmeter with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection
T), the Flow Temperature shows the temperature of the process
CMethod: 5504 CMethod: N/A material flowing through the Vortex meter. For a flowmeter without
temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection N), enter the flow
Damp: 2004 Damp: None temperature in this parameter in the specified units.
MI 019-224 71
Table 39 - Measurement Parameters (Continued)
4 Config Densty EGU: 3310 EGU: lb/ft3 Density: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
density of the fluid.
LRV: 2408 LRV: N/A
If you configure the calculation method to User On, be sure to enter the
URV: 2316 URV: N/A reference density (ThRefD), reference temperature (ThRefTD), and the
thermal coefficient of density (ThCoefD).
If you choose to use a custom density unit, define your custom unit by
AlertSt: 5011 4AlertSt: N/A first entering a Label for your custom unit using up to eight
alphanumeric characters. Then, enter any Offset and a conversion
CMethod: 5508 CMethod: N/A factor (Slope) to convert from kilograms per cubic meter to the custom
unit.
4 Config FlwMas EGU: 3305 EGU: lb/h Mass Flow: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
mass flow measurement.
URV: 2306 URV: N/A
AlertSt: 5006 Default: 59
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config Velcty EGU: 3307 EGU: ft/s Velocity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
velocity.
URV: 2310 URV: N/A
AlertSt: 5008 4AlertSt: N/A

4 Config Visc EGU: 3311 EGU: cPoise Viscosity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
viscosity of the fluid.
If you configure the Calculation Method to User On, be sure to enter the
AlertSt: 5012 4AlertSt: N/A reference viscosity (ThRefV), reference temperature (ThRefTV), and
the thermal coefficient of viscosity (ThCoefV).
CMethod: 5509 CMethod: N/A
4 Config Raw N/A EGU: Hz Raw Vortex Frequency: Configure the measurement properties
associated with the raw vortex frequency.
N/A URV: N/A
4 Config EleTemp EGU: 3313 EGU: degF Electronics Temperature: Configure the measurement properties
associated with the temperature of the electronics module.
LRV: 2412 LRV: N/A
URV: 2320 URV: N/A
Default: 1010 Default: 70
4 Config HtCon EGU: 3312 EGU: degF Heat Content:32 Configure the measurement properties associated with
the heat content.
LRV: 2410 LRV: N/A
URV: 2318 URV: N/A
Default: 1008 Default: Fluid

based (0 for
AlertSt: 5013 custom fluids)
CMethod: 5510 4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: N/A

32. This measurement only applies to steam (SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam). Set HtCon to 0 for User Liquid, User Vapor, and User
Gas.
72 MI 019-224
Table 39 - Measurement Parameters (Continued)
4 Config HtFlow EGU: 3308 EGU: J/sec Heat Flow: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
heat flow.
LRV: 2404 LRV: N/A
URV: 2312 URV: N/A
CMethod: 5506
2 FlwEGU (Available 3303 bbl/d Flowmeter EGU: (Applies to Oil & Gas personality only) Select an
for Oil & Gas appropriate engineering unit for Oil and Gas applications.
personality only. This
parameter is accessed
from the 1 OilGas > 2
FlwEGU menu
selection.)
Setting Totalizer Parameters

The flowmeter provides three separate totalizers that track various measurements as
material flows through the meter. You can map each of the totalizers independently to
track different flow measurements. For example, one totalizer can track the total
volume of material that flows through the transmitter while another totalizer can track
the total mass.
• When totalizing Heat Flow, the result is the total amount of Energy in the form of
heat that has been transferred with the flowing fluid.
• Mass Flow is totalized to Mass.
• Velocity is the only rate that is not totalized.
• When using the Oil & Gas personality, the flowmeter supports a single totalizer
labeled “Total” which is always mapped to Volumetric flow. The Total EGU follows
the Volume Rate EGU (for example, bbl/d will result in a total in barrels).
In addition to the values that the totalizer accumulates, each totalizer also has a status
describing the validity of the totalizer’s value at a particular point in time, and a two-
digit rollover counter. Each totalizer’s value, status, and rollover counter value can be
displayed using a variety of methods.
You can perform the following operations on totalizers:
• Starting totalizer accumulation
• Stopping totalizer accumulation
• Resuming totalizer accumulation
• Clearing existing totals
See Totalizer Actions, page 91 for more information.
You can also configure each totalizer independently with the following operations:
• Changing engineering units
• Changing totalizer mapping
• Changing display formats, which also sets the rollover limit
Totalizer values, both reported and intermediate, as well as configuration and status
information are persistent and are maintained over a flowmeter power cycle. An alert
appears if a totalizer is turned on during a power cycle.
If a totalizer is on and the flowmeter enters an offline state:
MI 019-224 73
• Totalizers that are currently on are turned off.

• The totalizer is not cleared and its value remains at the last known value, as long
as the totalizer configuration is not changed. The totalizer is not cleared and its
value remains at the last known value.
• Totalizer status is set to either the status at the time the flowmeter went offline or
W:Offline, whichever is worse.
• If the totalizer configuration changes, for example, if you change totalizer
mapping, engineering units, or rollover limits, the totalizer is cleared and its value
is set back to zero, even if you ultimately cancel the totalizer configuration
change.
When the flowmeter returns to an online state, the totalizer remains off.
See Totalizer/Pulse Control Registers, page 156 and Totalizer Configuration
Registers, page 157.
Controlling Access to Totalizer Configuration and Data

You can control access to totalizer configuration and data by moving a write protect
jumper in the flowmeter hardware. When using the local display, you can also control
access by configuring passwords. Such safeguards are important when using
totalizers for custody transfer applications, where the total flow of a material from one
place to another needs to be carefully and accurately tracked, or to prevent
unintentional or malicious changes to configuration and data.
For information on setting the jumper to the protect or write positions, refer to Setting
the Write Protect Jumper, page 49.
For information on controlling totalizer access using passwords on the local display,
see Totalizer Access Restrictions, page 98.
Totalizer Display Options

Totalizers accumulate data from their mapped flow in one of the following user-
configurable formats:
• XXXXXXX
• XXXXXX.X
• XXXXX.XX
• XXXX.XXX
• XXX.XXXX
• XX.XXXXX
• X.XXXXXX
Each display format has a rollover counter and a built in rollover limit. For example, if
you set the display format to XXX.XXXX, values up to 999.9999 will appear on the
display. For values of 1,000 and above, a rollover counter is incremented and the
totals that appear on the display restart at 0.
Since the rollover counter is a two-digit number on the local display, the maximum
value the rollover counter can reach is 99. For rollover counters above 99, RO **
appears on the local display, but the flowmeter continues to accumulate totals and
increment the rollover counter, and the totalizer value continues to appear on the
display.
Note that totalizer display formats cannot be changed while the totalizer is on.
Instructions for configuring display formats for totalizers and other measurements are
provided in Configuring the Home Screen, page 82.
See Measurement Registers, page 145 and Status Registers, page 149.
74 MI 019-224
Totalizer Status
Totalizer Status describes the validity of the totalizer value at a particular time. In order
of least to most severe, a totalizer’s status can be:
• OK
• ALERT
• BAD
A totalizer’s status is “sticky,” meaning that a totalizer’s status will persist even if the
condition causing the alert condition has cleared. For example, you may see a
message indicating the mapped source’s value has reached its configured hard upper
limit since last clearing the totalizer. The totalizer must be explicitly cleared in order for
its status to change.
Generally, totalizers inherit the status of their mapped flow measurement, with a few
exceptions. First, if a flow measurement mapped to a totalizer has an OUT OF
SERVICE status, the totalizer’s status will be BAD. Additionally, a totalizer may set its
status to a higher severity than that of the mapped flow measurement based on
totalizer operation.
Like totalizer values, totalizer status persists across a flowmeter power cycle.
Configuring a Totalizer (T1, T2, or T3)

Configure each totalizer as follows:
NOTE: Be aware that changing the totalizer configuration using this procedure will
turn the totalizer off and clear it.
1. Configure each totalizer from the 1 Setup > 2 Total > 3 Tot1 (or 3 Tot2 or 3 Tot3)
menu selection (local display).
See the Totalizer Configuration Menu Diagram, page 124 for the menu on the
local display for the General or Steam personalities. The Totalizer Configuration
menu is not available for the Oil & Gas personality.
Table 40 - Totalizer Parameters (for Totalizer 1, Totalizer 2, and Totalizer 3)
4 Map See Pulse Total Volume Map Totalizer: Allows you to map each totalizer to a measurement.
Configuration Choose Volume, BVolume, Mass, Vor Cnt, or Energy.
Registers, page 157
When mapping a totalizer, consider the following guidelines:
• You cannot map a totalizer to a measurement that uses custom
units at the time of mapping. If you want the mapped
measurement to use custom units, configure the custom units
after mapping the measurement to the totalizer.
• You cannot map one totalizer as an input to another totalizer.
• You cannot map two or more totalizers to the same measurement.
4 EGU See Unit Code gal Engineering Units: Allows you to configure units for each totalizer.
Registers, page 149 Initially , each totalizer’s EGUs are set to a non-rate version of the
mapped measurement’s default units. For example, if you mapped a
totalizer to Volume and the volumentric flow EGU is configured to cubic
feet per second, the totalizer’s EGU is set to cubic feet by default.
If you select Custom, define the custom unit first. First, enter a label for
your custom units, using up to eight alphanumeric characters. Then,
enter any offset and conversion factor (slope) to convert from base units
to your custom units in kilograms (for mass units) or cubic meters (for
volume or base volume units).
For example, The slope for a custom unit of a 42 gallon barrel would be
6.2898 because 6.2898 bbl =1 m3.
MI 019-224 75
2. If desired, configure access to the totalizer configuration and data:

a. For information on installing the write protect jumper, see Setting the Write
Protect Jumper, page 49.
b. For information on configuring passwords (local display only), see Using
Passwords, page 96.
3. If desired, configure the totalizer display options, which also sets the rollover limit.
See Configuring the Home Screen, page 82.
4. To turn the totalizer on, see Totalizer Actions, page 91.
Setting Output Parameters

The Output function allows you to configure communication parameters, pulse output,
and display parameters.
Setting Communication Parameters

Configure the communication parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Coms
See the Modbus Communication Menu Diagram, page 125 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities and see Output Menus - Modbus
Communication Menu Diagram, page 138 for the menu on the local display for the Oil
& Gas personality.
For more information on the registers, see Modbus Communications Registers, page
154.
Table 41 - Communication Parameters
4 Station 6600 99 Station Address: Enter the Modbus address of the flowmeter between
1 and 247.
4 Baud 6601 9600 Baud Rate: Set the Baud Rate for the Modbus communications.
Select, 4800, 9600, or 19200.
4 Parity 6602 NoParity Parity: Set the parity for the Modbus communication. Select NoParity,
Odd, or Even.
4 StopBit 6603 OneBit Stop Bit: Select the stop bit for the Modbus communication. Select
OneBit or TwoBits.
4FltSwap 6604 Full Float Swap: Enter the byte-swapping format to be used. Choose:
• Full (Full swap)
• Word (Word swap)
• WordByte (Word and byte swap)
• None (No swap)
See 32-Bit Register Byte Format, page 76 for definitions of the byte-
swapping formats.
Table 42 - 32-Bit Register Byte Format
Option Example Result

Full ABCD → DCBA Big-endian format (default)
Word ABCD → CDAB Big-endian format, with words swapped
76 MI 019-224
Table 42 - 32-Bit Register Byte Format (Continued)

WordByte ABCD → BADC Little-endian format, with words swapped
None ABCD → ABCD Little-endian format
Configuring Pulse Output

The flowmeter produces a pulse signal in addition to the standard signal. You can
configure the flowmeter’s pulse output to one of the following modes:
• Pulse Output, Raw mode generates a pulse frequency according to the
detected raw vortex frequency after filtering according to the low flow cut-in
(LFCI) parameter.
• Pulse Output, Pulse mode generates one pulse output per given quantity of
material flowing through the sensor. Valid measurement mappings are shown in
the table.
• Pulse Output, Frequency mode generates a pulse frequency proportional to a
mapped measurement. Valid measurement mappings are shown in the table.
• None allows you to turn off the pulse output capability. When Pulse Output is off,
the flowmeter maintains its digital output continuously in the non-conductive
state.
Table 43 - Mapping Measurements to Pulse Outputs
Measurement Raw Mode Pulse Mode Freq Mode
Volume Rate (VolFlow) Yes (Default) Yes (Default)
Base Volume Rate Yes Yes

Mass Flow Rate Yes Yes
Pressure Yes
Flow (Process) Temp Yes
Density Yes
Raw Vortex Yes Yes

Vortex Signal Yes Yes
Heat Content Yes

Heat Flow Yes Yes
Configuring Pulse Output, Raw Mode

Use Pulse Output, Raw mode if you want to generate a pulse frequency according to
the detected raw vortex frequency.
To configure raw mode, navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse > 4 Pulse
menu (local display), and select Raw as the type of pulse output.
(Applies to local display only) When the flowmeter enters an offline state (for example,
if you enter the Setup or Cal/Test menus), Pulse Output becomes zero. When the
flowmeter returns to an online state, the Pulse Output returns to the raw output.
MI 019-224 77
Configuring Pulse Output, Pulse Mode

Use Pulse Output, Pulse mode if you want to track the total quantity of material
flowing through the sensor and generate individual pulse output signals for each fixed
quantity of material that flows through the sensor.
Consider the following points when using Pulse Output, Pulse mode:
• Turning Pulse Output, Pulse mode On clears the accumulated pulse output
values. Resume turns Pulse mode on without clearing the values. To turn Pulse
Output, Pulse mode on, see Pulse Actions, page 90. To turn Pulse mode on using
registers, see Totalizer/Pulse Control Registers, page 156.
• The Pulse Factor parameter allows you to configure either the number of flow
units one pulse output signal represents (units per pulse) or the number of pulse
output signals that represent a single unit of flow (pulses per unit).
• The Pulse Factor’s engineering units are configured in the Pulse Factor Units
parameter.
◦ When you initially enter Pulse mode, the Pulse Factor engineering units
parameter is set to the non-rate version of the currently mapped source’s
engineering units (EGUs). For example, if pulse output is mapped to VolFlow
and the units for volumetric flow are gallons per second, the Pulse Factor
engineering units parameter is set to gallons.
– If the mapped source is configured with custom units at the time of
mapping, mapping will not be allowed. The mapped source EGU can be
changed to custom units after mapping, but this will have no effect on the
Pulse Factor engineering units parameter.
◦ The Pulse Factor engineering units parameter is set automatically when
entering Pulse mode, or when mapping or remapping the pulse output.
However, the Pulse Factor engineering units parameter does not
automatically update when the units associated with the mapped source
change.
◦ You can also set the Pulse Factor engineering units parameter from a list of
options when you are configuring Pulse output, Pulse mode.
• Because the pulse duty cycle is fixed at 50%, configuring the minimum pulse
width can limit the frequency of the pulse output. The pulse width limits the
frequency of the pulse output because of the signal’s 50% duty cycle. For
example, configuring a pulse width of 50 ms means that the fastest the pulse
signal will be sent out is at 10 Hz: 1/(2 x 0.05 s) = 10 Hz
The following table shows the minimum pulse width settings and their maximum
frequency equivalents. Alternatively, you can select a custom pulse width
between 0.05 and 500 ms.
NOTE: If the value of the rate measurement mapped to the Pulse Output
exceeds its Upper Range Value, the actual pulse output frequency may
exceed the maximum frequency shown in the table by up to 5%.
Table 44 - Minimum Pulse Widths and Maximum Frequency Equivalents
Minimum Pulse Width Maximum Frequency Equivalent
0.05 ms 10,000 Hz
0.5 ms 1,000 Hz
5 ms 100 Hz
50 ms 10 Hz
Custom (user entered value between 0.05 ms 10 Hz – 10,000 Hz
and 50 ms)
78 MI 019-224
• As shown in Pulse Output Mapping to Rate Measurement, page 79, the Pulse
Factor setting (Pulse Factor Units per Pulse or Pulse Factor Pulses per Unit) and
Minimum Pulse Width settings are bounded such that the Maximum Frequency
represents at most the Upper Range Value and at least, the minimum span of the
mapped measurement.
Any attempt to set the Pulse Factor or Minimum Pulse Width to a value would
require:
◦ A Pulse Frequency greater than the Maximum Frequency to represent the
mapped measurement’s Upper Range, or
◦ A Pulse Frequency less than the Minimum Frequency to represent the
mapped measurement’s minimum span will be rejected by the transmitter.
Figure 32 - Pulse Output Mapping to Rate Measurement
Upper Range Limit

Minimum Span
Upper Range Value
Rate Measurement mapped to Pulse Output

0 In User EGU (i.e. gallons per second)
Flow Operating Region
FacP/U or FacP/U in non-rate User EGU (i.e. gallons)
Pulse Output region

Max. Frequency (Min. Pulse Width in ms)
Pulse Output Frequency (Hz)

0
Upper Range Value
Minimum Span Frequency Equivalent Frequency Equivalent
Limits for Max. Frequency calculated from

the Rate Measurement Minimum Span and
Upper Range Value using the Pulse Factor
• When the transmitter enters an offline state, for example, if you enter the Setup
menu, the following actions are taken, even if you ultimately cancel the
configuration change.
◦ Pulse Output is turned off and becomes zero.
◦ Pulse output status is set to the worse of W:Offline and status before it went
offline.
◦ When the transmitter returns to an online state, Pulse Output remains off and
remains at zero, and the status remains set.
• If the pulse output configuration changes, for example, if you change pulse output
mapping, the pulse output is cleared and its value is set back to zero, even if you
ultimately cancel the configuration change.
MI 019-224 79
• If the flowmeter has an alert, the following occurs:

◦ Output will be set to 0 Hz. The Pulse Output does not accumulate for the
duration of the alert.
◦ A status is set.
◦ A diagnostic alert will be set by the source of the alert.
◦ If the flowmeter recovers from the alert, the original output will resume, but the
status and diagnostic error remain.
◦ Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
represent a valid flow measurement.
◦ Similar to totalizers, the pulse accumulation can be stopped and resumed.
Configure Pulse Output, Pulse mode from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse menu
selection (local display).
See the Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Configuration Menu Diagram, page 126 for the
menu on the local display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse Output,
Pulse Mode Configuration menu is not available for the Oil & Gas personality.
Table 45 - Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Parameters
4 Pulse 8200 Freq Pulse Mode: Select Pulse to configure the Pulse Output to pulse
mode.
4MapPul 8301 VolFlow Pulse Map: Select the measurement to which you want to map the
pulse output. Choose VolFlow, BVolFlow, MassFlow, Vor Freq, or Heat
Flow.
4PWidth 8304 5 ms Pulse Width: Select the pulse width, which is a function of the mapped
flow rate, how much flow each pulse represents, and the maximum
pulse frequency. Choose standard pulse widths of 0.05, 0.5, 5, or
50 ms, or select Custom. Keep in mind that configuring the pulse width
may also limit the frequency of the pulse output because of the signal’s
50% duty cycle. See Minimum Pulse Widths and Maximum Frequency
Equivalents, page 78.
4FacEGU 8300 gal Pulse Factor Units: Select the engineering units that the Pulse Factor
will (see the Pulse Factor Units Per Pulse or Pulse Factor Pulses per
Unit parameters below). If possible, this parameter is initially set to the
non-rate version of the currently configured mapped source’s EGUs.
For example, if Pulse Output is mapped to VolFlow and the units for
volumetric flow are gallons per second, Pulse Factor Units would be
gallons.
4 FacU/P 8302 1 Pulse Factor Units per Pulse and Pulse Factor Pulses per Unit:
Enter the Pulse Factor. You can choose to configure the number of flow
4 FacP/U 8306 1 units one pulse output signal represents (units per pulse) or conversely,
you can configure the number of pulse output signals that represent a
single unit of flow (pulses per unit).
• If you want to configure the number of units per pulse, navigate to
units per pulse and enter the number of flow units represented by
one pulse signal. The opposite Pulse Factor, pulses per unit,
updates automatically.
• If you want to configure the number of pulses per unit, navigate to
pulses per unit and enter the number of pulses that will represent
one unit of flow. The opposite Pulse Factor, units per pulse,
updates automatically.
Configuring Pulse Output, Frequency Mode

Use Pulse Output, Frequency mode if you want to generate a pulse frequency
proportional to a mapped measurement.
Consider the following points when using Pulse Output, Frequency mode:
80 MI 019-224
• (Applies to local display only) When the flowmeter enters an offline state, for
example if you select the Setup or Calibration/Test menus, pulse output becomes
zero. When the flowmeter returns to an online state, the pulse output returns to
the calculated pulse frequency.
• Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
• If the output frequency is less than 0.5 Hz, the pulse output is held permanently
non-conducting.
• Pulse output produces outputs up to 125% of the pulse URV. For example, if the
pulse URV is 100 Hz, the flowmeter will continue to transmit a linear output up to
125 Hz, but will not exceed 125 Hz.
• If the source measurement AlertSt is set to AlertBad and the source
measurement has an alert, the following occurs:
◦ Output will be set to the user-selected default frequency; however, the pulse
output signal transmitted will be 0 or ≥ 150% of the pulse URV.
◦ A status is set.
◦ A diagnostic alert will be set by the source of the alert.
◦ If the flowmeter recovers from the alert, the original output will resume and the
status returns to OK, but the diagnostic alert remains.
• If the source measurement alert strategy is set to On Alert Continue and the
source measurement has an alert, the pulse output follows the source
measurement and could go up to, but will not exceed, 125% of the selected
output.
Configure Pulse Output, Frequency mode from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse
See Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Configuration Menu Diagram, page 127 for the
menu on the local display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse Output,
Frequency Mode Configuration menu is not available for the Oil & Gas personality;
however the Pulse per Unit Factor parameter is available from the Oil & Gas main
menu (see Oil Gas Main Menu, page 136).
Table 46 - Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Parameters
4 Pulse 8200 Freq Pulse Mode: Select Freq or Frequency to configure the Pulse Output
to pulse frequency.
4MapFreq 8400 VolFlow Map Frequency: Select the measurement to which you want to map
the pulse output. Choose VolFlow, BVolFlow, MassFlow, Velocity, Vor
Freq, Density, FlwTmp, Heat Con, or Heat Flow.
4 LRV 8401 0 Lower Range Value: LRV should be 0, indicating a no flow condition.
4 URV 8403 1000 Upper Range Value: Set the output frequency that corresponds to the
mapped measurement’s upper range value. Choose 10, 100, 1000,
10,000, or Custom..
4DefFrq 8405 0.000 Hz Default Frequency: Set the offline default frequency end point. Values
are limited to 0 or ≥ 150% of the mapped measurement’s Upper Range
Value (URV).
4 Damp 2000 None Damping: Select the damping factor. Choose 0 to 32 seconds.
2 Puls/U (Available for 8306 4200 Pulse per Unit Factor: (Applies to Oil & Gas personality only) Enter
Oil & Gas personality the number of pulse output signals that represent a single flow unit.
only. This parameter is
accessed from the 1
OilGas > 2 Puls/U
menu selection.)
MI 019-224 81
Turning Off Pulse Mode

To turn pulse output off, navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 Output >3 Pulse > 4 Pulse menu
(local display), and select None.
To turn Pulse mode on of off using registers, see Totalizer/Pulse Control Registers,
page 156.
Pulse Output Status

Pulse Output Status describes the validity of the pulse output value at a particular
point in time. In order of least to most severe, a pulse output status can be:
• OK
• ALERT
• BAD
When the flowmeter is in Pulse mode, the pulse status is “sticky,” meaning that the
status will persist even if the condition causing the alert condition has cleared.
For example, you may see B:>HardU, which means that the mapped source’s value
has reached its configured hard upper limit since last clearing the pulse output. You
must explicitly clear the pulse output total value for its status to change. Generally,
pulse output inherits the status of its mapped flow measurement, with a few
exceptions. First, if a flow measurement mapped to the pulse output has an OUT OF
SERVICE status, the pulse output status will be BAD. Additionally, pulse output may
set its status to a higher severity than that of the mapped flow measurement based on
operation. Like pulse values, pulse status persists across the flowmeter power cycle.
Configuring the Home Screen

The following measurements can be configured to appear on the home screen:
• FlwVol: Volume flow
• FlwBVo: Base volume flow
• FlwMas: Mass flow
• Velcty: Velocity
• Total1: Totalizer 1 reading
• Densty: Density
• Visc: Viscosity
• Press: Pressure
• FlwTmp: Process Temperature
• PulFrq: Pulse Output frequency (in Frequency mode) or Pulse Output total value
(in Pulse mode)
• Raw: Raw Vortex Count
• Heat Content: HtCon
• Heat Flow: HtFlow
NOTE: You cannot change totalizer display formats while the totalizer is
accumulating values.
Choose whether each measurement will be displayed (On) or hidden (Off). On the
local display, you also select the display format for each measurement that is turned
on. The following are display formats for most measurements:
82 MI 019-224
AutoFormat XXXXX.XX XX.XXXXX

XXXXXXXX XXXX.XXX X.XXXXX
XXXXXX.X XXX.XXXX XXXXeXXX
If you select AutoFormat, the flowmeter selects the most appropriate display format
based on the measurement’s upper range value.
Configure the home screen from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3Display menu selection
(local display).
See Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page 128 for the menus on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities; see Output Menus - Display
Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page 138 for the menus on the local display for
the Oil & Gas personality.
Table 47 - Home Screen Parameters
Local Display Register Factory Default Description
4CfgShow > 5 Select N/A FlwVol: Show Measurements: Select the measurements to be shown on the
On/AutoFmt display. Specify whether each measurement should be displayed
4 CfgShow > 5 Select (turned on) or not display (turned off). For the local display only, specify
> 6 Show The remaining the display format for each measurement that is turned on.
measurements
4 CfgShow > 5 Select are set to Off/
> 6 Format AutoFmt:
FlwBvo, FlwMas,
Velcty, Tot1,
Tot2, Tot3,
Densty, Visc,
Press, FlwTmp,
PulFrq, Raw,
HtCon, HtFlow
4Show1st N/A FlwVol Show First: Select the measurement that will appear first when the
measurements are automatically or manually scanned on the display.
Only the Show Measurements parameters that have been turned On

are displayed and available for selection.
4 Cycle N/A Manual Display Cycle: Specify whether the list of measurements configured
will be scanned automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual).
For example, if you specify that Total1 should be shown first and you set
the Display Cycle to Manual, the Totalizer 1 reading appears first and
you can manually cycle through the other configured measurement
parameters.
Setting Piping Parameters

Configure piping from the 1 Setup > 2 Pipe menu selection (local display).
See the Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram, page 131 for the menu on the local display
for the General and Steam personalities and see the Pipe Configuration Menu
Diagram, page 140 for the menu on local display for the Oil & Gas personality.
MI 019-224 83
Table 48 - Piping Parameters
3 Piping > 4 Config 11055 Straight Upstream Piping Configuration: Select the upstream
piping configuration from the following:
• Straight
• 1 EL PAR (1 elbow with shedder parallel to elbow
plane)
• 1 EL PER (1 elbow with shedder perpendicular to
elbow plane)
• 2L0PDPAR (2 elbows with shedder parallel to plane of
closest elbow and distance between elbows is zero
pipe diameters)
• 2L0PDPER (2 elbows with shedder perpendicular to
plane of closest elbow and distance between elbows is
zero pipe diameters)
• 2L5PDPAR (2 elbows with shedder parallel to plane of
closest elbow and distance between elbows is 5 pipe
diameters)
• 2L5PDPER (2 elbows with shedder perpendicular to
plane of closest elbow and distance between elbows is
5 pipe diameters)
• Reducer
See Piping Configurations, page 85.
3 Piping > 4 UpDist 11050 0 Upstream Distance: Enter the distance to the first upstream
flow disturbance in pipe diameters.
3BoreSch 11054 Sched 40 Bore Schedule: Select the pipe bore. Choose from
Sched 10, Sched 40 Sched 80, PN16, PN40, PN64, PN100,
or Sanitary.
3 Custom 11052 0 Custom Kref Bias: Input the Kref Bias in percent (%). For
example, to change Kref by 2%, enter 2.0000.
84 MI 019-224
Figure 33 - Piping Configurations
1 EL PAR 1 EL PER
FLOW
DIRECTION FLOW
DIRECTION
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
FROM ELBOW
FROM ELBOW
2 L0 PD PAR 2 L0 PD PER
2 L5 PD PAR 2 L5 PD PER
FLOW
X DIRECTION
SEPERATION DISTANCE
FLOW BETWEEN ELBOWS FROM ELBOW
SEPERATION X DIRECTION
BETWEEN 2 L0 PD PER X=0 PD
DISTANCE
ELBOWS 2 L5 PD PER X=5 PD
FROM ELBOW
2 L0 PD PAR X=0 PD
2 L5 PD PAR X=5 PD
REDUCER
Setting Flowtube Parameters

Configure flowtube parameters such as model code, serial number, and the K Factor
from the 1 Setup > 2 NewMod menu selection (local display).
See the NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram, page 132 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities and see the NewMod Configuration
Menu Diagram, page 141 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas
personality.
MI 019-224 85
Table 49 - Flowmeter Parameters
3 Model 6500 N/A Model Code: Enter the model code of the flowtube as found on the
flowmeter tag. If the flowtube and electronics were shipped as a unit,
the model code was preconfigured.
NOTE: When entering the Model Code, do not select a space
character as it will truncate the entered string and process the
model code entry incorrectly.
3 Ref No 11000 123456789abc- Reference Number: Enter the reference number (serial number) of the
defg flowtube (16 characters maximum) as found on the flowmeter tag. The
reference number was preconfigured if the flowtube and electronics
were shipped as a unit.
Update the reference number only if you have modified the flowmeter
model code. Do not change the model code or the reference number if
the transmitter was shipped with the flowtube as a unit.
3 K Ref > 4 K EGU 3314 p/ft3 K Reference Units: Select the unit for the reference K-factor. See
Units, page 15.
3 K Ref > 4 K Ref 11500 258 Reference K Factor: Enter the reference K-factor as found on the
flowmeter tag.
Setting Advanced Options

Configure advanced options from the 1 Setup > 2 Advance menu selection (local
display).
See the Advanced Options Menu Diagram, page 132 for the menu on the local display
for the General and Steam personalities and see the Advanced Options Menu
Diagram, page 141 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality.
Table 50 - Advanced Option Parameters
3 Per Sel 10000 General Personality: Select the personality to be used for this application.
Choose from General, Steam, or Oil & Gas.
NOTE: When you change from one personality to another,
many configuration parameters are automatically set to default
values.
NOTE: Pulse must be turned off before changing the
personality.
3AdvOpts41 N/A N/A Advanced Options: The selections provide a additional options for
configuring custom flowtubes. Contact Global Customer Support
for information and assistance.
3SetMode N/A Normal Menu Mode: Select the menu mode to be used. Select Normal
(the default), ViewOnly, or ShowAll.
• Normal: Only the appropriate configuration-specific menu
items are visible in the menu system.
• ViewOnly: Like Normal mode, only the appropriate
configuration-specific menu items are visible in the menu
system. In this mode, the menu system is read-only. With the
exception of changing the menu mode, you cannot make any
changes to the flowmeter’s configuration or operating
parameters.
• ShowAll: All menu entries, regardless of whether they apply
to the current configuration, are shown in the menu system.
Only safety limits are applied to lists and enterable fields;
otherwise, all options are shown in the menu system.

41. This menu is reserved for advanced options.
86 MI 019-224
Table 50 - Advanced Option Parameters (Continued)
3NoiseRd Coil 101 (On= Method1 Noise Reduction Method: The flowmeter provides noise
Method1, Off=Basic) reduction methods which can be applied to the Raw Vortex
frequency measurement in noisy environments. Select either
Method1 or Basic:
• Method1: Default behavior. If the Raw Vortex frequency
exceeds its Soft Limit, the reported frequency is clamped
when it reaches a value slightly above the Soft Limit value.
The Raw Vortex frequency status is set to W:>SoftU,
indicating it has exceeded its Soft Limit, and the VolumeFlow,
MassFlow, and BaseVolumeFlow Rates will be calculated
using the reported Raw Vortex frequency based on the Flow
damping setting.
The status of all Flow Rates is set according to the selected
AlertSt (see the Alert Strategy parameter in Measurement
Properties, page 62).
• Basic: Selects the behavior of the previous models, 84 Style
A and Style B. When the measured VolumeFlow, MassFlow,
or BaseVolumeFlow Rate exceeds its Hard Limit, Flow
damping is bypassed and the reported Rate is set to the
corresponding Hard Limit value. Totalization and Pulse
Output then follow the Reported Rate value. The status of all
Flow Rates is set according to the selected AlertSt (see the
Alert Strategy parameter in Measurement Properties, page
62). This should only be used if you desire an immediate
indication via a full scale Rate value being reported, when an
undamped rate measurement exceeds its Hard Limit, even
momentarily.
3 ClrRTU N/A N/A Clear RTU: The RTU can be used to set the measurements that
display on the local display. The ClrRTU selection allows you to
clear the fields set from the RTU and return to using the
measurement fields configured from the Setup menu on the local
display.
Resetting the Database

To reset the flowmeter to its factory default values:
1. Navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 SetDef menu selection (local display).
See the Resetting the Database Menu Diagram, page 132 for the menu on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities and see the Oil Gas Main
Menu, page 136 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality.
2. When prompted to reset to the factory defaults, choose Yes.
3. The message DONE displays.
4. Save the configuration changes.
Calibration and Test

The following Calibration and Test functions can be performed on the flowmeter.
• Set the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI)
• Calibrate the process temperature (if the flowmeter has an optional temperature
sensor, RTD)
• Clear the Time in Service meter
• Use the flowmeter to test the loop
MI 019-224 87
• Use the flowmeter to test the pulse output

See the Calibration/Test Menu Diagram, page 133 for the menu on local display for
the General and Steam personalities and see the Calibration/Test Menu Diagram,
page 142 for the menu for the Oil & Gas personality.
Calibration
You can set the automatic LFCI, calibrate the process temperature (if your flowmeter
has an optional temperature sensor), and clear the Time in Service meter from
Calibration.
Automatic LFCI Selection

The flowmeter’s Auto-LFCI function automatically sets the Low Flow Cut-In threshold
to reject ambient no-flow noise conditions; the flowmeter chooses the lowest level at
which no signal is detected over a fixed time interval.
NOTE: The Auto-LFCI function is NOT a dynamically adjusting value.
This one-time function “watches” a zero-flow condition and determines the best LFCI
setting. The zero flow is based on seeing a nonzero reported vortex frequency. The
flowmeter uses this LFCI setting until you change it manually or run the Auto-LFCI
function again.
If the LFCI gets to the largest LFCI value and still detects a vortex frequency, the Auto-
LFCI function reports it. It does not change the LFCI setting. In this case, you can set
the LFCI manually.
The flow must be zero during this procedure.
NOTE: This procedure may confirm your choice of LFCI setting in Setting Tuning
Parameters, page 69. However, if it selects a different value, it overwrites your
selection unless you cancel the changes.
1. Set the process flow to zero.
2. Select 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3CalLFCI (local display) or set the LFCI from
registers using Coil 107. (For more information on Coil 107, see Auto LFCI
Procedure, page 164.)
The flowmeter starts testing the most sensitive LFCI setting. If a false flow signal
is detected within a fixed time period, the LFCI is increased to the next level. This
process continues until a level is reached where the flowmeter does not detect
any false flow signals. While the function is executing, Busy and the maximum
time remaining appear on the display.
When complete, the new LFCI setting appears on the display.
Calibrating the Temperature Sensor

If your flowmeter has an optional temperature sensor (RTD), you can calibrate the
temperature sensor or restore the sensor’s factory calibration. Calibration of the
temperature sensor is normally not required. This calibration procedure adds an offset
to match another device.
To calibrate the temperature sensor:
1. Navigate to the 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3 CalRtd > 4CalUser (local display).
2. Select 5RtdEgu (local display). Note the engineering units used by the
temperature sensor.
88 MI 019-224
3. Select 5CurTmp (local display). Enter the current temperature in the selected
engineering units.
4. Save your changes.
To calibrate the temperature sensor (RTD) using registers, use Coil 104. See RTD
Calibration Procedure, page 163.
Restoring the Temperature Sensor Factory Settings

To restore the temperature sensor’s factory calibration settings:
1. Select 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3 CalRtd > 4Restore (local display).
The message Applying appears on the display.
To restore the factory calibration on the temperature sensor (RTD) using registers,
use Coil 105. See RTD Calibration Procedure, page 163.
Clearing the Time in Service Meter

The flowmeter has a Time in Service meter which tracks the number of days that the
flowmeter has been in service. The Clear Time in Service function allows you to clear
the User-Managed Time in Service meter that reports the number of days the
flowmeter has been in service since the last reset.
To reset the Time in Service meter:
1. Navigate to 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3ClrSrvT and select ENTER.
2. At the Clr Now? prompt, select ENTER.
3. When the Time in Service meter has been reset, a DONE prompt displays.
To clear the Time in Service meter using registers, use Coil 100. SeeCoils, page 162.
Test
In Test mode, you can self test the flowmeter or use the flowmeter to test the loop.
Testing the Loop

The flowmeter can be used as a signal source to check and/or calibrate other
instruments in the control loop, such as indicators, controllers, and recorders. To do
this, set the frequency pulse output or digital output signals to any value within the
range limits of the meter.
To test the loop:
1. Navigate to 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Test (local display) and select the calibration source:
• Frequency pulse output (applies to Pulse Frequency Mode): 3 Set Hz (local
display)
Set the selected signal to any value within the range limits of the meter.
MI 019-224 89
Testing the Flowmeter

The self test checks the flowmeter operation by injecting, near the front end of the
electronics, an internally generated periodic signal of known frequency. The frequency
of this signal is in turn measured and checked against the injected signal.
During the self test, the status of measurements will be set to Offline. In addition,
totalizer values will not be updated, but totalizer status will indicate that the totalizer
has not been running for a period of time.
To run a self-test:
1. Select 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Test > 3SelfTst (local display) or start self test from registers
using Coil 106. For more information on Coil 106, see the User Self Test
Procedure, page 163.
Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
2. Clear the totalizers after the self test. Refer to Totalizer Actions, page 91 for
instructions.
Pulse Actions
If Pulse Output is configured for Pulse mode, the number of pulse signals that the
flowmeter transmits up to the current point in time represents the total flow value up to
that point, where individual pulse signals represent a user-specified amount of the
total flow value.
You can control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the total flow
value.
When in Pulse mode, Pulse Output can be in one of two states:
• ON: The flowmeter is actively accumulating values and transmitting pulse signals.
• OFF: The flowmeter is not actively accumulating values or transmitting pulse
signals, and any previously collected values may or may not have been cleared.
For information on the flowmeter’s pulse output and how to configure pulse output,
refer to Configuring Pulse Output, page 77.
When Pulse Output is set to Pulse mode, you can turn pulse accumulation on, turn
pulse accumulation off, clear the pulse output totals collected up to the current point in
time, or resume collecting pulse outputs by selecting the following options:
• On: This option clears existing pulse totals and the flowmeter starts transmitting
and accumulating pulse signals. This option can be selected only if pulse output
is off.
• Resume: Without clearing the existing pulse totals, the flowmeter starts
transmitting and accumulating pulse signals. This option can be selected only if
pulse output is off.
• Clear: If pulse output accumulation is off, this option clears existing pulse totals.
You cannot clear existing pulse output totals while the flowmeter is accumulating
values.
• Off: The flowmeter stops transmitting and accumulating pulse signals. The
existing pulse totals are saved up to the current point. This option can be selected
only if pulse output is on.
To turn the pulse output accumulation on, turn pulse output accumulation off, clear the
pulse output accumulation, or resume collecting pulse output totals, complete the
steps below.
See the Pulse Actions Top Level Menu Diagram, page 129 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse Actions Top Level menu is
90 MI 019-224
not available for the Oil & Gas personality. To turn Pulse mode on or off using
registers, see Totalizer/Pulse Control Registers, page 156.
1. On the local display, press ENTER to stop the display of measurements and
select ENTER at the 1 Pulse menu.
2. Select On, Off, Resume, or Clear.
3. Save the selection.
Totalizer Actions
The flowmeter provides three separate totalizers that accumulate flow measurements
to keep track of amounts of flow. (If you are using the Oil & Gas personality, there is
only a single totalizer.) Each of the totalizers can be mapped independently to keep
track of different flow measurements.
You can control how the flowmeter starts and stops accumulation of the total flow
value. For information on the flowmeter’s totalizer capabilities and how to configure
totalizers, refer to Setting Totalizer Parameters, page 73.
Each totalizer can be in one of two states:
• ON: The totalizer is actively accumulating flow values.
• OFF: The totalizer is not actively accumulating flow values, and any previously
collected totalizer values may or may not have been cleared.
You can turn totalizers on, turn totalizers off, clear the totalizers, or resume
accumulation by selecting the following options:
• On: This option clears existing totals and the flowmeter starts totalizer
accumulation. This option can only be selected if the totalizer is off.
• Resume: Without clearing the existing totals, the flowmeter starts totalizer
accumulation. This option can be selected only if the totalizer is off.
• Clear: If accumulation is off, this option clears existing totals. You cannot clear
existing totals while the flowmeter is accumulating values.
• Off: The flowmeter stops totalizer accumulation. The existing totals are saved up
to the current point. This option can be selected only if the totalizer is on.
To turn the pulse output accumulation on, turn pulse output accumulation off, clear the
pulse output accumulation, or resume collecting pulse output totals, complete the
steps below.
See the Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram, page 130 for the menu on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities and see the Totalizer Actions
Top Level Menu Diagram, page 142 for the menu on local display for the Oil & Gas
personality. To turn Totalizers on or off using registers, see Totalizer/Pulse Control
Registers, page 156.
1. On the local display, press ENTER to stop the display of measurements and
select ENTER at the 1 Totx menu selection (x can be 1, 2, or 3).
2. If prompted, enter the Lo password (local display only).
3. Select On, Off, Clear, or Resume.
4. Save the selection.
Messages
These tables define the most common operation, configuration, and status messages,
and the actions needed to address them.
MI 019-224 91
Some messages may appear periodically with a valid flow measurement. This
typically occurs when soft limits are exceeded; the messages mean that a hard limit is
approaching.
Operational Messages
Table 51 - Operational Messages
Message Explanation Corrective Action

Override The flowmeter is being overridden by an external host, None; this is a notification that the flowmeter is being
such as another configurator or control system. overridden.
W: Input Alert: An input to a specific measurement or calculation Make sure configured flowing temperature is within the
has exceeded the normal limit and is in the soft limit temperature limits of the sensor.
region.
Check the raw frequency to determine if it is out of limits for the
B: Input Bad Input: An input to a specific measurement or flowmeter size.
calculation has exceeded the soft limit. This adversely
affects all measurements.
W: Offln Alert: The transmitter goes offline when a totalizer is When the transmitter enters an offline state, any running
running. totalizers are turned off, and this message is generated.
Resume, or turn the totalizer(s) back on using the Totalizer

Actions menu (see Totalizer Actions, page 91.
Boot App The firmware is corrupted. This may be due to an Contact Global Customer Support.
incomplete firmware upgrade through special hardware
supplied to the user.
Boot CMD The unit has been commanded to stay in boot mode.
Configuration Messages
Table 52 - Configuration Messages
Message Explanation Corrective Action
WrProtct The write protect jumper is missing or is You cannot change the configuration unless the jumper is in the WRITE
in the PROTECT position. position. Install or move the write protect jumper to the WRITE position. See
Setting the Write Protect Jumper, page 49.
Cfg Err An incorrect model code was entered. Enter the correct model code as it appears on the flowmeter’s data plate.
MsCode
Bad URV The entered URV has exceeded the Press Enter to change the URV to the value of the URL. Verify that the
URV=URL URL (meter capacity) of the flowmeter. entered value for Flowing Density is correct.
Bad URV The entered URV is less than the Press Enter to change the URV to the minimum value allowed. Verify that the
URV=Min minimum value allowed for the URV. LFCI setting and the value for Flowing Density is correct.
The minimum URV is three times the LFCI flow rate. For applications where
the URV is very low relative to the flowmeter’s capacity, this error message
may appear when this constraint is violated. This can be the result of lowering
the URV, increasing the LFCI setting, or decreasing the Flowing Density
(increasing the corresponding LFCI flow rate values).
FcErr E:0x#### An internal function did not execute If this message occurs at startup, an invalid configuration exists. Recheck the
successfully. configuration.
If this message occurs during setup, review the inputs associated with the last
menu function.
If these steps do not resolve the problem, re-enter the model code.
92 MI 019-224
Status Messages
The following tables describe four types of status messages:
• Informational messages indicate that the measurement is operating within
normally expected limits.
• Alert status (W:) messages indicate that the measurement is operating outside
the normally expected limits, but not outside the hard limits. An alert message is
also generated if a measurement is configured to continue when encountering a
bad value (that is, AlertSt is set to NoAlert).
• BAD status (B:) messages indicate that the measurement is outside the hard
limits.
• Out-of-Service status (O:) messages usually mean that the measurement is not
supported by the available hardware.
Table 53 - Informational Status Messages
Message Description
Ok All inputs and calculations are okay.
InputFxd An input is fixed. Other input is live.
Paused A measurement is frozen.

Override A measurement has been overridden.
IsDeflt A measurement is always using default.
Table 54 - Alert Status Messages
Message Description
W:<SoftL Outside lower soft limit. Value not clamped.
W:>SoftU Outside upper soft limit. Value not clamped.
W:Input An input has an alert status.
W:RtdSht RTD is shorted.

W:RtdOpn RTD is open.
Table 55 - Bad Status Messages
Message Description
B:<HardL Outside lower hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:>HardU Outside upper hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:Input An input has a BAD status.
B:NotRdy Measurement is not ready.
B:iNoRdy An input is not ready.
B:iUsrOf An input is turned off by the user.
B:iFacOf An input is turned off by the factory.
B:IntBad Measurement has an internal bad value.

B:RtdSht RTD is shorted.
B:RtdOpn RTD is open.
B:OvrHL Override is outside the hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:OvrSL Override outside soft limit. Value not clamped.
MI 019-224 93
Table 56 - Out-of-Service Status Messages
Message Description
O:UsrOff Measurement was turned off by the user. This message may appear when changing the
model code, for example. If the hardware is supported, update the model code to put a
measurement in service.
O:FacOff Measurement is turned off because measurement hardware is not available.
94 MI 019-224
Using the Local Display Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Using the Local Display

This chapter describes how to operate the flowmeter using the optional local display. It
also provides menu diagrams that are available on the local display.
Local Display and Home Screen

An optional local display provides real-time measurement information, function status,
and reference information. With four multi-function keys, the display also provides a
means of performing device configuration, calibration, and self-test, along with
Totalizer and Pulse actions.
During normal operation, the flowmeter displays a selected measurement value, the
name and engineering units of the measurement currently being displayed, and other
status and diagnostic information specific to the selected measurement on the home
screen (shown in Local Display and Home Screen, page 95). You can configure one
or more measurements appropriate for your application to appear on the home
screen, and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the selected
measurements’ values.
The home screen is fully configurable. Depending on your application and the
flowmeter’s model code, you can customize the home screen to manually or
automatically cycle among one or more flowmeter measurements including: volume
flow, mass flow, velocity, density, viscosity, pressure, process temperature, pulse
output, raw vortex count, heat content, heat flow, or any of the totalizer readings. The
home screen also displays rollover counters for totalizer readings and any alerts that
exist have been generated.
Figure 34 - Local Display and Home Screen

Name of measurement Engineering units (EGUs)
currently being displayed of measurement currently
BACK being displayed
Total1 gal
ESC
Four multi-function keys

(ESC, BACK, ENTER, NEXT)
to navigate through the
999999.9 ENTER
Measurement value
menu system
RO 00 Paused
Rollover counter
indicator and value Status of measurement
(appears only for totalizers) currently being displayed
NEXT
Flowmeter configuration and operation is accomplished with the four multi-function

keys:
MI 019-224 95
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Using the Local Display
Key Function
Left Arrow (ESC) • Moves left in the menu structure

• Moves the cursor to the left in a data entry field
• Escapes from changes in a pick list menu or data entry43
• Answers No to prompts
Right Arrow (ENTER) • Moves right in the menu structure

• Used to access the data entry edit mode of a parameter
• Moves the cursor to the right in a data entry field
• Enters the changed menu pick list choices or data entry43
• Answers Yes to prompts (for example, Save ->)
• Allows you to view information containing too many characters to appear
on the display. For example, use ENTER when checking fluid parameter
values to view all digits of the values.
Up Arrow (BACK) • Moves upward in the menu structure, a pick list menu, or list of
characters
Down Arrow (NEXT) • Moves downward in the menu structure, a pick list menu, or list of
characters
Measurement
During normal operation, the real-time flowmeter measurements that you specify
during flowmeter configuration display. By default, the volumetric flow rate appears on
the display, and you can also view the list of all the other configured values.
The values displayed are fully configurable.
If the display is configured for a Manual cycle, a user-configured measurement
appears on the display, and you can manually scroll through the other configured
measurements manually. If configured for an Auto cycle, the display cycles through
the measurements you specified during flowmeter configuration automatically.
For additional information on configuring the measurement display, see Configuring
the Home Screen, page 82.
Using the Flowmeter Software

Using Passwords
Viewing the flowmeter’s operation and configuration data does not require that you
enter a password. However, the flowmeter has a two-level password system that can
restrict access to specific flowmeter functions during online and offline local
configuration.
• The Hi password is an administrator password that controls access to all
flowmeter functions such as configuring, calibrating, and testing the flowmeter.
• The Lo password controls access to starting, stopping, resuming, and clearing
totalizers, and also switching between the menu modes (View Only, Normal or
Show All).
Once you enter the appropriate password, the menu system “remembers” the
password until you exit the menu session, that is when the display returns to showing
measurements.
Both Hi and Lo passwords are 4-character alphanumeric strings.
43. On data entry, repeatedly press the key until the cursor reaches the end of the display.
96 MI 019-224
NOTE:
• If you want to use the Lo password, a non-blank Hi password must also be
configured. The Lo password has no effect if the Hi password is not
configured or is blank (set to 4 spaces)
• The flowmeter is shipped from the factory with blank passwords. This allows
access to all flowmeter functions. If password protection is required, configure
the Hi password from the 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd menu selection
first, and then configure a Lo password from 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 LoPwd
menu selection, if required.
• If you lose your password, contact Global Customer Support for assistance.
When navigating to a function that requires a password, perform the following steps:
1. The prompt HiPswd? or LoPswd? appears on the display if the function requires
a Hi or Lo password, respectively. Press ENTER at the prompt.
2. Two brackets surrounding four spaces appear on the display with a flashing
cursor positioned at the first character.
3. Use the up and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT) to scroll through the list of
acceptable characters.
4. Select the desired character and press the right arrow key (ENTER) to move to
the next character.
5. Continue this process until the password is complete, and then press the right
arrow key (ENTER) to move the flashing cursor to the right bracket.
6. Press ENTER to complete entering the password. If you need to modify an
incorrect character, use the left (ESC) and right (ENTER) arrow keys to move
back and forth.
After passwords have been configured, if you enter an incorrect password when
prompted for one, the display indicates Sorry Error, and then redisplays the
password prompt to allow you to enter the correct password. If you exit out of the
prompt by pressing the left arrow key (ESC) without entering a password, the menu
system displays 2Rd Only and is set to Read Only mode.
Turning On Password Restrictions

To turn on password restrictions:
1. Set the Hi (Admin) password first:
a. Go to 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd and press ENTER. See the Password
Configuration Menu Diagram, page 133 for the menu on the local display for
the General or Steam personality and see the Password Configuration Menu
Diagram, page 142 for the menu on the local display for the Oil and Gas
personality.
b. Enter four alphanumeric characters for the Hi password using the arrow keys
and then press ENTER.
NOTE: You must configure the HiPwd before configuring the LoPwd.
2. Set the Lo (User) password:
a. Navigate to 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 LoPwd and press ENTER.
b. Enter four alphanumeric characters for the Lo password using the arrow keys
and then press ENTER.
3. Save your configuration changes and exit to the Home screen for the passwords
to take effect.
MI 019-224 97
Turning Off Password Restrictions

To turn off password restrictions:
1. Go to 1 Setup and enter the Hi password at the HiPwd? prompt. See the
Password Configuration Menu Diagram, page 133 for the menu on the local
display for the General or Steam personality and see the Password Configuration
Menu Diagram, page 142 for the menu on the local display for the Oil and Gas
personality.
2. Navigate to 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd and press ENTER.
3. Enter four blanks (spaces) for the Hi password using the arrow keys and then
press ENTER.
4. Navigate to 3 LoPwd and press ENTER.
5. Enter four blanks (spaces) for the Lo password using the arrow keys and then
press ENTER.
6. Save your configuration changes and exit to the Home screen for the password
configuration changes.
Totalizer Access Restrictions

You can control access to totalizer configuration and data by configuring passwords.
Such safeguards are important when using totalizers for custody transfer applications,
where the total flow of a material from one place to another needs to be carefully and
accurately tracked, or to prevent unintentional or malicious changes to configuration
and data.
The table describes access restrictions for various totalizer operations. Although there
are exceptions as noted in the table below, generally, the Lo (User) password restricts
the ability to start, stop, or resume accumulating totals and clear existing totals, and
the Hi (Admin) password restricts access to the Setup menu, which contains the
options for changing engineering units and mapping.
Table 57 - Totalizer Access Restrictions
Access Restriction for Totalizer Actions

Totalizer 1 Operations Totalizer 2 Operations Totalizer 3 Operations
Start Start Start

Hi and Lo Resume Resume Resume
Write Passwords Stop Change Units Stop Change Units Stop Change Units
Protection Configured Clear or Mapping Clear or Mapping Clear or Mapping
Off No Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted
On Both Read only Read only Lo (User) Read only Not restricted Read only
Off Both Lo (User) Hi (Admin) Lo (User) Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin)
Off Hi only Not restricted Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin)
NOTE: To use the Lo (User) password, you must also have a Hi (Admin)
password configured.
For information on configuring passwords, refer to Using Passwords, page 96.
Calibration/Test Access Restrictions

Access to the Calibration/Test menu can be restricted with passwords.
If passwords are configured, you may need to enter the Hi password to perform the
functions available from the Calibration/Test menu.
98 MI 019-224
Activating an Edit, Pick List, or User Menu Block

To open a menu block that allows you to edit or select data or to perform a function,
move to the menu block and press the right arrow (ENTER) key.
Editing Numbers and Strings

You can edit any number or string in the menu system the same way that you would
enter a password. The up and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT) scroll through a
list of acceptable characters for the current position. The right arrow key (ENTER)
moves the cursor to the right. It also accepts the change at the end. The left arrow key
(ESC) moves the cursor to the left. It also cancels the change at the beginning.
There are three kinds of items you can edit: signed numbers, unsigned numbers, and
strings.
Signed Number
Signed numbers always have a + or - sign at the beginning. The + can only be
changed to -, and vice versa.
Unsigned Number
For unsigned numbers, cycle through the digits 0-9, and the decimal point, with the up
and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT). When you enter a decimal point in any
position, and there is already a decimal point, the new decimal point overrides the old
one.
Strings
Characters in strings can be changed to any character provided in the pick list. You
can sequence through the list of characters by pressing the up or down arrow keys
(BACK or NEXT). To enter the change, you must still press ENTER from the right side
of the data field, after scrolling to the right side with the right arrow key (ENTER).
Picking from a List

Pick list items allow you to choose a selection from a flowmeter-supplied list of
choices. Go to the applicable parameter, and press ENTER. The entire bottom line of
the display flashes. If you press the up or down arrow keys (BACK or NEXT), the
display shows the previous or next choice respectively from its list. Pressing ENTER
accepts the change; pressing ESC returns the previous selection.
MI 019-224 99
Accessing the Menu System from the Home Screen

From the Home screen, you can access the flowmeter’s main menu and the Pulse
and Totalizer action menus ss shown in Accessing the Top Level Menus from the
Home Screen, page 100.
Figure 35 - Accessing the Top Level Menus from the Home Screen
Measurement n (optional)
Press ESC on the Home screen to ...
ESC
go to the Main Menu, then use the up Measurement 1
and down arrows (BACK and NEXT)
to scroll through the choices Press ENTER on the Home screen to go
in the menu:
- 1Measure (see Measure Mode)
999.9999 ENTER
to the Total/Pulse Actions menu, then use
the up and down arrows (BACK and NEXT)
- 1 Status (see Status Mode) to scroll through the choices in the menu:
- 1 Setup (see Setup Mode - 1 Pulse (see Pulse Actions) (a)
- 1Cal/Tst (see Calibration/Test Mode) - 1 Tot1 (see Totalizer Actions)
- 1 Tot2 (see Totalizer Actions)
- 1 Tot3 (see Totalizer Actions)
(a) The Pulse Actions menu appears only when pulse output is in Pulse mode.
Configuration Example
This example demonstrates how to achieve a pulse output for Mass Flow, and how to
display Total Mass.
The example includes the following configuration steps performed using the local
keypad/display pushbuttons:
1. Configuring a User Fluid
2. Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow
3. Displaying Total Mass
Configuring a User Fluid

Configure the following parameters:
• Fluid Type (Fluid) = User Liquid
• Fluid Name (Name) = Example Liquid
• Reference density of the liquid (ThRefD) = 49.0172
• Reference Temperature (ThRefTD) = 75
• Δ Density/Δ Temperature (ThCoefD) = -0.034529561
For more information, see Updating Fluid Parameters, page 67.
100 MI 019-224
1. Select 1 Setup > 2 Fluid > 3 Flud as follows:

a. Press the left arrow (ESC) to access the main menu and use the down arrow
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
c. The Loop in Manual? prompt displays. This prompt reminds you that you
are going offline. If you are using the output of this meter for control, set your
control loop to manual, and then press ENTER in response to this prompt.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Press ENTER.
e. The 3 Fluid User Liquid menu displays. Press ENTER. The display blinks
with asterisks (*****).
f. Select the desired fluid type from the pick list using the up and down arrows,
then then press ENTER to lock-in your selection.
2. Press NEXT to select 3 Name. Enter the name (“Example Liquid”) by editing the
string. When done, press ENTER. You are asked to confirm your entry with the
Sure? prompt. Press ENTER.
3. Press NEXT to select 3 Config FlwTmp. Use the right arrow and the up and
down arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done,
press ENTER to return to 3 Config FlwTmp.
4. Press NEXT to select 3 BasTmp and enter the base temperature for Standard or
Normal Volume by editing the value. When done, press ENTER.
5. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Density. Use the right arrow and the up and
down arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done,
press ENTER to return to 3 Config Density.
6. Press NEXT to select 3 BasDen and enter the base density for Standard or
7. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Press. Use the right arrow and the up and down
arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done, press
ENTER to return to 3 Config Press.
8. Press NEXT to select 3 BasPres and enter the base pressure for Standard or
9. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Visc. Use the right arrow and the up and down
arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done, press
ENTER to return to 3 Config Visc.
10. Press NEXT to select 3 ThCoefD and enter the Thermal Coefficient Expansion
for Density (-0.034529561). When done, press ENTER.
11. Press NEXT to select 3 ThRefTD and enter the Thermal Reference Temperature
by editing the string (75). When done, press ENTER.
12. Press NEXT to select 3 ThRefD and enter the Thermal Reference Density
(49.0172). When done, press ENTER.
13. Set the ThCoefV, ThRefTV, and ThRefV using the same procedure as Steps 10,
11, and 12.
14. Press ESC to select 2 Fluid.
15. Press ESC to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
16. Press ENTER to save the configuration. You are asked to confirm your entries
with the SURE? prompt. Press ENTER to complete the configuration.
The user fluid is now fully configured.
MI 019-224 101
Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow

Configure the following parameters:
• 4 Pulse = Pulse
• 4 MapPul = MassFlow
• 4 PWidth = 0.500 ms
• 4 FacEGU = lb
• 4 FacU/P = 2.204633 lbs per pulses
• 4 FacP/U = no change (driven by FacU/P setting)
For details, see Configuring Pulse Output, Pulse Mode, page 78.
1. Select 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse as follows:
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
control loop to manual, then press ENTER in response to this prompt.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 2 Output. Press
ENTER.
e. The 3 Coms menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 3 Pulse. Press
ENTER.
2. The 4 Pulse None menus displays. Press ENTER and then use the down arrow
to select Pulse. Press ENTER.
3. The 4 MapPul VolFlow menu displays. Use the down arrow to select MassFlow.
Press ENTER.
4. The 4 PWidth 0.500 ms displays. Press ENTER to modify that value, or press
the down arrow to use it as is.
5. The 4FacEGU lb menu displays. Press ENTER to modify that value, or press the
down arrow to use it as is.
6. The 4 FacU/P menu displays. Enter 2.204633. When done, press ENTER.
7. The 4 FacP/U menu displays. This setting is driven by the FacU/P setting. Press
the down arrow.
8. Press ESC to display the 3 Pulse menu.
9. Press ESC to display the 2 Output menu.
10. Press ESC again to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
Displaying Total Mass

First specify that Mass is displayed in one of the Totalizers (Tot1) and then turn on
Tot1.
For more information, see Configuring a Totalizer (T1, T2, or T3), page 75 and
Totalizer Actions, page 91.
102 MI 019-224
1. To specify that Mass is displayed in Totalizer 1, select 1 Setup > 2 Total > 3 Tot1
as follows:
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
control loop to manual, then press ENTER in response to this prompt.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 2 Total. Press
ENTER.
e. The 3 Tot1 menu displays. Press ENTER.
2. The 4 Map Volume menu displays. Press ENTER.
3. Use the down arrow to select Mass. Press ENTER.
4. The 4 EGU lb menu displays. Select the desired EGU and press ENTER.
5. Press ESC to display the 3 Tot1 menu.
6. Press ESC to display the 2 Total menu.
7. Press ESC again to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
9. To turn on Totalizer 1, press ENTER to display 1 Tot1 Off menu.
10. Press ENTER. Use the down arrow to select On. Press ENTER.
The configuration is now complete.
Menus
The menus that are available on the local display depend on the personality that was
selected for the flowmeter. For more information on personalities, see Personalities,
page 58.
MI 019-224 103
Menus for the General and Steam Personalities

Figure 36 - Status Menu Diagram
ENTER ENTER ENTER To/From

2MeaStat 3 Select Measurement
ESC ESC ESC Status Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NotProt
ESC
2 WrProt NEXT BACK
ESC
Prot
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 DiagEr
ESC
1 Status
NEXT BACK
2 Reason
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 SW Rev
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 Primary
ESC
2 Srv Tim NEXT BACK
ESC
3 User
ESC
104 MI 019-224
Figure 37 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram (1 of 2)

ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
Raw 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Velcty 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total1 NEXT BACK Densty 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK Visc 4 EGU
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total2 NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Press 4 EGU

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK 4 Value
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
Total3 NEXT BACK Reynld 4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK To/From KCor

on Measurement
4 More Status Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
MI 019-224 105
Figure 38 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From Reynld
NEXT BACK
on Totalizer Menu ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC FlwVol 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
KCor 4 EGU
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC
4 Value ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC FlwMas 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
PulFrq 4 EGU
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC FlwBVo (a) 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp 4 EGU
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Value ENTER
ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC
HtCon 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
EleTemp 4 EGU
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Value ENTER
ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlw 4 EGU
ESC
(a) FlwBVo is not available in the Steam personality.
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
106 MI 019-224
Figure 39 - Setup Main Menu

ENTER ENTER
To/From
2 Fluid
Fluid Menus
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Tuning Tuning Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Total
ESC Totalizer Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Measure-
2 Measure ment Config Menus
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Output
2 Output
ESC Menus
ESC
1 Setup NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Pipe Piping Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 NewMod
ESC Flowtube Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Advanced
2Advance Options Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Resetting
2 SetDef
ESC Database Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Passwd
2 Passwd Config Menu
ESC ESC
MI 019-224 107
Figure 40 - Fluid Menu Diagram

ENTER
User Liquid (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
User Vapor (a)
ESC
3ThCoefD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 Fluid User Gas (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
3ThRefTD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
SaturatedSteam (b) NEXT BACK

ESC
3 ThRefD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
SuperHeatedSteam (b) NEXT BACK

ESC
3ThCoefV (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 Name OPTIONAL NEXT BACK
3ThRefTV (c) TO EDIT VALUE

NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From FlwTmp
3 Config FlwTmp Config Menu NEXT BACK
ESC
3 ThRefV (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 BasTmp TO EDIT VALUE
(a) User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas are only
NEXT BACK
ENTER available in the General personality.
To/From Densty (b) SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam are only
3 Config Densty Config Menu
ESC available in the Steam personality.
(c) These parameters only apply to configurable
NEXT BACK liquids available from the General personality and
only appear in the menu if a User Fluid is currently
3 BasDen TO EDIT VALUE selected:
- User Liquid
NEXT BACK - User Vapor, and
ENTER - User Gas.
To/From Pressure
3 Config Press Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 BasPrs TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Viscosity
3 Config Visc Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
108 MI 019-224
Figure 41 - Process Temperature (FlwTmp) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
4Default TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
3 Config FlwTmp ESC ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4
ESC
4CMethod NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
32
ESC
MI 019-224 109
Figure 42 - Density Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Config Densty
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4CMethod User On
ESC ESC
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
110 MI 019-224
Figure 43 - Pressure Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
3 Config Press ESC ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4
4CMethod ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
MI 019-224 111
Figure 44 - Viscosity Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
3 Config Visc NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
NEXT BACK
4CMethod User On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
112 MI 019-224
Figure 45 - Tuning Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
Off
ESC
3 RdCorr NEXT BACK
On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
4 FlwEGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
LFCI 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 Tuning LFCI 3
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 LFCI LFCI 4
ESC ESC
4Setting NEXT BACK

ESC
LFCI 5
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 6
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 7
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 8
ESC
MI 019-224 113
Figure 46 - Measurement Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25 ENTER ENTER

ESC To/From FlwVol
4 Config FlwVol
Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
0.5 To/From FlwBVo
ESC
4 Config FlwBVo (a) Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1 ENTER
ESC To/From Press
4 Config Press
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
3FlwDamp 2 ENTER
ESC To/From FlwTmp
4 Config FlwTmp Config Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 ENTER
ESC To/From Densty
4 Config Densty
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
8 To/From FlwMas
ESC
4 Config FlwMas Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16 3MeasCfg ENTER
ESC To/From Velcty
4 Config Velcty
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
32 To/From Visc
ESC 4 Config Visc Config Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Raw
4 Config Raw
ESC Config Menu
ESC
(a) 4Config FlwBVo is not available in the Steam personality .
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From EleTmp
4 Config EleTmp Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From HtCon
4 Config HtCon
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From HtFlow
4 Config HtFlow Config Menu
ESC
ESC
Figure 47 - Volumetric Flow (FlwVol) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config FlwVol NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
4AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
114 MI 019-224
Figure 48 - Base Volumetric Flow (FlwBVo) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
StdVol
ESC ESC
5EGUTYP NEXT BACK
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
4 Config FlwBVo (a) NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
(a) The Config FlwBVo menu is not available in the

Steam personality.
MI 019-224 115
Figure 49 - Pressure Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE ENTER

ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
4 Config Press NoAlert 0.5
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad 1
ESC ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef 5 Damp 2
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def 4
ESC ESC
5CMethod NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
ByRemote 8
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
116 MI 019-224
Figure 50 - Process Temperature Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Config FlwTmp 5AlertSt AlertBad

ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
4
ESC
5CMethod NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
MI 019-224 117
Figure 51 - Density Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Config Densty 5AlertSt AlertBad

ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 16
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
Figure 52 - Mass Flow (FlwMas) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config FlwMas NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
118 MI 019-224
Figure 53 - Velocity (Velcty) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config Velcty NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
Figure 54 - Viscosity (Visc) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
4 Config Visc NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
By Remote
ESC
MI 019-224 119
Figure 55 - Raw Vortex Frequency (Raw) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
4 Config Raw NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
120 MI 019-224
Figure 56 - Electronic Temperature (EleTemp) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
4 Config EleTmp
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 Damp 2
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
MI 019-224 121
Figure 57 - Heat Content (HtCon) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

None
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
0.5
ESC ESC
4 Config HtCon NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
4
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 16
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
122 MI 019-224
Figure 58 - Heat Flow (HtFlow) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Config HtFlow 5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
MI 019-224 123
Figure 59 - Totalizer Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Tot1
ESC
Energy
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 Total 3 Tot2
ESC
ESC
Energy
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
3 Tot3
Energy
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
(a) BVolume and 4 EGUTYP are not available in the Steam personality .
124 MI 019-224
Figure 60 - Modbus Communication Menu Diagram

ENTER
4 Station TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Baud TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Coms 4 Parity TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
4StopBit TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
4FltSwap TO PICK LIST

ESC
MI 019-224 125
Figure 61 - Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
4 Pulse NEXT BACK
Freq
ESC
NEXT BACK
Pulse
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
VolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 MapPul MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
Vor Freq
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
0.05 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
0.5 ms
NEXT BACK
4 PWidth 5 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
50 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4FacEGU TO PICK LIST
NEXT BACK
4 FacU/P TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
4 FacP/U TO EDIT VALUE
(a) BVolFlow is not available in the Steam

personality.
126 MI 019-224
Figure 62 - Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Configuration Menu Diagram
ENTER
None NEXT BACK
ESC ENTER
10 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
100 Hz
4 Pulse NEXT BACK ESC
Freq NEXT BACK

ESC
4 URV 1000 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
Pulse NEXT BACK

ESC
10000 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
VolFlow NEXT BACK
ESC
Custom
NEXT BACK ESC
BVolFlow (a) NEXT BACK

ESC TO EDIT
VALUE
NEXT BACK
4DefFreq TO EDIT VALUE
MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
Velocity ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
0.25
4MapFreq Vor Freq ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
0.5
Density ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1
FlwTmp ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Damp 2
Heat Con ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4
HeatFlow ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
8
4 LRV ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
(a) BVolFlow is not available in the
Steam personality.
32
ESC
MI 019-224 127
Figure 63 - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER To/From
4CfgShow Display Config
ESC Menu – page 2
NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwBVo
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwMas
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velcty
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total1
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total3
ESC
NEXT BACK
4Show1st (a) Densty

ESC
NEXT BACK
Visc
ESC
NEXT BACK
Press
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
NEXT BACK
PulFrq
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtCon
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Auto
ESC
4 Cycle NEXT BACK
Manual
ESC
(a) If Show is set to Off for a particular measurement, that

measurement does not appear in the 4Show1st menu.
4Show1st only shows those measurements that are configured
to appear on the Home screen.
128 MI 019-224
Figure 64 - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Display Config
Menu – page 1
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
On
ESC ESC
5 Select: 6 Show NEXT BACK
FlwVol Off
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwBVo (a) ENTER
AutoFmt
FlwMas ESC
NEXT BACK
Velcty
XXXXXXXX
ESC
Total1 NEXT BACK
Total2 ESC
XXXXXX.X
NEXT BACK
Total3
XXXXX.XX
ESC
Densty NEXT BACK
Visc 6 Format XXXX.XXX

ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
Press
FlwTmp XXX.XXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
PulFrq
XX.XXXXX
ESC
Raw NEXT BACK
HtCon X.XXXXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
XXXXeXXX
ESC
(a) FlwBVo is not available in the Steam personality.
Figure 65 - Pulse Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Pulse (a) NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
To/From
Totalizer Menu
(a) Only available when Pulse Output is configured in Pulse mode.
MI 019-224 129
Figure 66 - Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
To/From
Totalizer Menu (a)
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot1 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot2 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot3 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
(a) Goes back to the 1 Pulse menu only when Pulse Output is
configured to Pulse Mode..
130 MI 019-224
Figure 67 - Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Straight
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
1 El Par
ESC
NEXT BACK
1 EL Per
ESC
NEXT BACK
2LoPdPar
ESC
4 Config NEXT BACK
3 Piping (a) 2LoPdPer

ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPar
ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPer
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reducer
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 UpDist
ESC
2 Pipe NEXT BACK

ENTER
Sched 10
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 40
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 80
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN16
ESC
3BoreSch (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
PN40
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN64
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN100
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sanitary
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
(a) Not available for all model codes.
MI 019-224 131
Figure 68 - NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 Model TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Ref No TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 NewMod NEXT BACK

ENTER
4 K EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
3 K Ref NEXT BACK
ESC
4 K Ref TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 69 - Advanced Options Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
General
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Per Sel (a) Steam

ESC
NEXT BACK
Oil&Gas
ESC
NEXT BACK
3AdvOpts (b)
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Normal
ESC
2 Advance NEXT BACK
3SetMode ViewOnly
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ShowAll
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Basic
ESC
3NoiseRd NEXT BACK
ESC
Method1
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 ClrRTU Clr Now?
ESC ESC
(a) Pulse must be turned off before changing the personality.

(b) 3AdvOpts is reserved for advanced options. Contact Global Customer Support for
information and assistance.
Figure 70 - Resetting the Database Menu Diagram

ENTER
2 SetDef Set Now?
ESC
132 MI 019-224
Figure 71 - Password Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 LoPwd TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
2 Passwd NEXT BACK
3 HiPwd TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 72 - Calibration/Test Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER TO EXECUTE ONE TIME
3 CalLFCI AUTO LFCI SELECTION
ESC
HiPaswd NEXT BACK
(a)
3ClrSrvT Clr Now?
ESC
NEXT BACK Loop in

Manual? 2 Calib
2Rd Only
NEXT BACK
1 Cal/Tst To/From
Read-only Calib
and Test menus
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Set Hz (a) TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 Test NEXT BACK

ESC
3SelfTst TO INVOKE SELFTEST

ESC
(a) Applies to Pulse Frequency Mode only.
MI 019-224 133
Menus for the Oil & Gas Personality

Figure 73 - Status Menu Diagram
ENTER ENTER ENTER To/From

2MeaStat 3 Select Measurement
ESC ESC ESC Status Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NotProt
ESC
2 WrProt NEXT BACK
ESC
Prot
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 DiagEr
ESC
1 Status
NEXT BACK
2 Reason
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 SW Rev
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 Primary
ESC
2 Srv Tim NEXT BACK
ESC
3 User
ESC
134 MI 019-224
Figure 74 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram

ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
Raw 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK PulFrq 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total NEXT BACK FlwTmp 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER
ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK EleTmp 4 EGU
ESC
Densty 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK FlwVol 4 EGU
ESC
KCor 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
MI 019-224 135
Figure 75 - Oil Gas Main Menu

ENTER
2 SetDef Set Now?
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
2 Puls/U TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Tuning
2Tuning
Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Output
2 Output
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Pipe
2 Pipe
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From NewMod
2 NewMod
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Advance
2Advance
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
2Passwd To/From Passwd
Config Menu
ESC
136 MI 019-224
Figure 76 - Tuning Menu Diagram
ENTER
3MaxRate TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3MxRt Hz TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
LFCI 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 3
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 4
ESC
NEXT BACK
4Setting
3 LFCI
ESC LFCI 5
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 6
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 7
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 8
ESC
2 Tuning NEXT BACK
4 LfUFac TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 FlwDmp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Filter TO PICK LIST

ESC
MI 019-224 137
Figure 77 - Output Menus - Modbus Communication Menu Diagram

ENTER
4 Station TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Baud TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Coms 4 Parity TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
4StopBit TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
4FltSwap TO PICK LIST

ESC
Figure 78 - Output Menus - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER To/From
4CfgShow Display Config
ESC Menu – page 2
NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4Show1st (a)
Total
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Auto
ESC
4 Cycle NEXT BACK
Manual
ESC
(a) If Show is set to Off for a particular measurement , that

measurement does not appear in the 4Show1st menu.
4Show1st only shows those measurements that are configured
to appear on the Home screen.
138 MI 019-224
Figure 79 - Output Menus - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Display Config
Menu – page 1
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
On
ESC ESC
6 Show NEXT BACK
Off
ESC
5 Select: NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwVol AutoFmt
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwMas
XXXXXXXX
Velcty ESC
NEXT BACK
Total
ESC
XXXXXX.X
Densty NEXT BACK
Visc XXXXX.XX
ESC
NEXT BACK
Press
6 Format XXXX.XXX
FlwTmp ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
PulFrq
XXX.XXXX
ESC
Raw NEXT BACK
HtCon XX.XXXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
X.XXXXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
XXXXeXXX
ESC
MI 019-224 139
Figure 80 - Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Straight
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
1 El Par
ESC
NEXT BACK
1 EL Per
ESC
NEXT BACK
2LoPdPar
ESC
4 Config NEXT BACK
3 Piping (a) 2LoPdPer

ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPar
ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPer
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reducer
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 UpDist
ESC
2 Pipe NEXT BACK

ENTER
Sched 10
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 40
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 80
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN16
ESC
3BoreSch (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
PN40
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN64
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN100
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sanitary
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
(a) Not available for all model codes.
140 MI 019-224
Figure 81 - NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 Model TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Ref No TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 NewMod NEXT BACK

ENTER
4 K EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
3 K Ref NEXT BACK
ESC
4 K Ref TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 82 - Advanced Options Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
General
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Per Sel (a) Steam

ESC
NEXT BACK
Oil&Gas
ESC
NEXT BACK
3AdvOpts (b)
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Normal
ESC
2 Advance NEXT BACK
3SetMode ViewOnly
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ShowAll
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Basic
ESC
3NoiseRd NEXT BACK
ESC
Method1
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 ClrRTU Clr Now?
ESC ESC
(a) Pulse must be turned off before changing the personality.

(b) 3AdvOpts is reserved for advanced options. Contact Global Customer Support for
information and assistance.
MI 019-224 141
Figure 83 - Password Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 LoPwd TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
2 Passwd NEXT BACK
3 HiPwd TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 84 - Calibration/Test Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER TO EXECUTE ONE TIME
3 CalLFCI AUTO LFCI SELECTION
ESC
HiPaswd NEXT BACK
(a)
3ClrSrvT Clr Now?
ESC
NEXT BACK Loop in

Manual? 2 Calib
2Rd Only
NEXT BACK
1 Cal/Tst To/From
Read-only Calib
and Test menus
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Set Hz (a) TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 Test NEXT BACK

ESC
3SelfTst TO INVOKE SELFTEST

ESC
(a) Applies to Pulse Frequency Mode only.
Figure 85 - Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
To/From
Totalizer Menu
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
142 MI 019-224
Modbus RTU Operation Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Modbus RTU Operation

Modbus RTU is a serial protocol that can be used in point-to-point or multidrop
RS-485 networks. Modbus commands are used to read from and write to registers
containing data.
Implementation of the Modbus RTU protocol in this product is based on the following
documents:
• PI-MBUS-300 Rev B: Modicon/Gould Modbus Protocol Reference Guide
• Modbus Over Serial Line Specification and Implementation Guide V1.02
• Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b3 at http://www.modbus.org
Modbus Commands
Table 58 - Command Function Codes
Command
Function Command Function Description
Code
1 Read coils Read multiple coils.
3
Read registers Read the contents of multiple registers.44
4
5 Write a single coil Set a single coil On or Off.
6 Write a single register Change the contents of a single register.
Perform diagnostic tests and return

8 Diagnostics communication status information. Refer to
Diagnostic Command Options, page 143.
15 Write multiple coils Set multiple coils On or Off.
16 Write multiple registers Change the contents of multiple registers.
17 Report server ID Read device-specific identification.
• Modbus commands and responses are limited to a total of 256 bytes.

• Read/write registers consist of two bytes of data in MSB-LSB (most significant
byte-least significant byte) order.
• A Modbus command to read multiple registers can access a contiguous block of
registers (up to 125) in a single transaction.
• A Modbus command to write multiple registers can write a contiguous block of
registers (up to 123) in a single transaction.
• For both read and write commands, the maximum register count is reduced by 1
when accessing floating point values.
Table 59 - Diagnostic Command Options
Diagnostic
Diagnostic Option Description45
Option Code
0 Return query data Heartbeat; forces the server device to loopback

this command as sent.
1 Restart communications Performs a complete reset of the communication
interface in the server device.
44. Although the Modbus specification distinguishes between commands 3 and 4, both commands are identical to the flowmeter.
45. All counts begin when power is cycled, communication is restarted (option 1), or diagnostic counters are cleared (option 10).
MI 019-224 143
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Operation
Table 59 - Diagnostic Command Options (Continued)
Diagnostic
Diagnostic Option Description46
Option Code
4 Force Listen Only mode Server device ignores all messages sent to it until
a restart communications command (option 1) is
received. This can be used to take a problem
device off the communications bus. Refer to Listen
Only Mode, page 145.
10 Clear diagnostic counters Sets all communication status counters to 0.
11 Return bus message count Returns the number of Modbus messages read on
the communications bus.
12 Return bus communication error Returns the number of CRC errors encountered by
count the server device.
13 Return bus exception count Returns the number of exception responses
returned by the server device. Refer to Modbus
Exception Codes47, page 144.
14 Return server message count Returns the number of Modbus messages

addressed to the server device.
15 Return server no response count Returns the number of instances when the server
device did not respond.
17 Return server busy count Returns the number of instances when the server
device could not perform the requested action
because it was busy.
18 Return bus character overrun Returns the number of bytes lost by the server
count device.
Table 60 - Modbus Exception Codes48
Code Name Description
01 Illegal function The function code in the query is not supported by

the server device.
02 Illegal data address The data address in the query is not allowed for
the server device.
03 Illegal data value A data value in the query is not allowed for the
server device.
04 Device failure An error was detected while the server device was
attempting to perform the requested action.
Modbus status registers are available to the communication host. These registers
contain detailed information if the server device returns an exception code. See
Modbus Status Registers, page 159.
Broadcast Messages
Station ID 0 is reserved for broadcast messages.
Server devices do not respond to broadcast messages. However, server devices do
act on broadcast write requests.
46. All counts begin when power is cycled, communication is restarted (option 1), or diagnostic counters are cleared (option 10).
47. Modbus exception codes are defined by the Modbus RTU protocol. For more information about the Modbus RTU protocol, visit http://www.
modbus.org. See for additional references.
48. Modbus exception codes are defined by the Modbus RTU protocol. For more information about the Modbus RTU protocol, visit http://www.
modbus.org. See Modbus RTU Operation, page 143 for additional references.
144 MI 019-224
Listen Only Mode

In Listen Only mode, the transmitter does not act upon nor respond to any command it
receives except for the Restart Communications command.
To enter Listen Only mode, use command code 8 (Diagnostics), diagnostic function
option 4 (Force Listen Only Mode).
To exit Listen Only mode, do any of the following:
• Use command code 8 (Diagnostics), diagnostic function option 1 (Restart
Communications). This command brings the transmitter back to normal operation
on the Modbus network.
• Cycle power to the transmitter.
• Restart communications with a restart/reset. The transmitter attempts to
reinitialize the communication channel.
Registers
Table 61 - Data Formats
Registers
Type Description
Required
Char 1 Two ASCII characters per register
UInt16 1 One unsigned 16-bit integer in the range 0 to 65535
Float 2 Floating point numbers are in the IEEE 754 format. Numbers are made up
of one sign bit (S), eight exponent bits (E), and 23 mantissa bits (M). A
number consists of four bytes as shown below:
Byte A Byte B Byte C Byte D
SEEE EEEE EMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM
Floating-point values are stored in two consecutive registers. Both

registers must be read or written in the same Modbus command. Not
doing so results in an exception response.
Host-specific formatting notes:

• These Modbus register addresses are “1-based.” Modbus host software that
follows this convention automatically subtracts 1 from any register address before
sending it in a command to a remote device. If your host software does not
perform this function, subtract 1 from the register addresses before you use them.
• Some host systems require that the register addresses be entered in a specific
format, such as 3xxxx for read-only, and 4xxxx for read/write or write-only.
Measurement Registers
Table 62 - Registers for Measurements
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write49
Totalizer 1 500 Float 2 RO
Totalizer 1 Rollover 502 Float 2 RO
49. RO=Read Only; WO=Write Only; RW=Read/Write.
MI 019-224 145
Table 62 - Registers for Measurements (Continued)
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write50
Pulse Output 512 Float 2 RO
Volume Rate 514 Float 2 RO

Volume Base Rate 516 Float 2 RO
Mass Rate 518 Float 2 RO
Process Temperature 520 Float 2 RO
Velocity 522 Float 2 RO
Power 524 Float 2 RO

Pressure 526 Float 2 RO
Density 528 Float 2 RO
Viscosity 530 Float 2 RO
Enthalpy 532 Float 2 RO
Reynolds 534 Float 2 RO
Electronics Temperature 536 Float 2 RO
K Corrected 538 Float 2 RO
User Default Registers

These are the default values to which the flowmeter sets the fluid measurement value
if there is an alert condition.
Table 63 - Registers for User Defaults
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write50
Process Temperature Default 1000 Float 2 RW
Pressure Default 1002 Float 2 RW

Density Default 1004 Float 2 RW
Viscosity Default 1006 Float 2 RW
Enthalpy Default 1008 Float 2 RW
Electronics Temperature Default 1010 Float 2 RW
146 MI 019-224
Remote Measurement Input Registers

Table 64 - Registers for Remote Measurement Input
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write51
Process Temperature Remote Value 1500 Float 2 RW
Pressure Remote Value 1502 Float 2 RW

Density Remote Value 1504 Float 2 RW
Viscosity Remote Value 1506 Float 2 RW
Enthalpy Remote Value 1508 Float 2 RW
Damping Registers
Table 65 - Registers for Dampings
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write51
Pulse Frequency Damping 2000 Float 2 RW
Volume Rate Damping 2002 Float 2 RW
Process Temperature Damping 2004 Float 2 RW
Pressure Damping 2006 Float 2 RW
Density Damping 2008 Float 2 RW
Enthalpy Damping 2010 Float 2 RW
Electronics Temperature Damping 2012 Float 2 RW
Upper Limit Registers

Table 66 - Registers for Upper Limits
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write51
Pulse Frequency URV 2300 Float 2 RW
Volume Rate URV 2302 Float 2 RW

Volume Base Rate URV 2304 Float 2 RW
Mass Rate URV 2306 Float 2 RW
Process Temperature URV 2308 Float 2 RW
Velocity URV 2310 Float 2 RW
Power URV 2312 Float 2 RW

Pressure URV 2314 Float 2 RW
Density URV 2316 Float 2 RW
Enthalpy URV 2318 Float 2 RW
Electronics Temperature URV 2320 Float 2 RW
MI 019-224 147
Lower Limit Registers

Table 67 - Registers for Lower Limits
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write52
Pulse Frequency LRV 2400 Float 2 RW
Process Temperature LRV 2402 Float 2 RW
Power LRV 2404 Float 2 RW

Pressure LRV 2406 Float 2 RW
Density LRV 2408 Float 2 RW
Enthalpy LRV 2410 Float 2 RW
Electronics Temperature LRV 2412 Float 2 RW
Unit Text Registers

Table 68 - Registers for Unit Text
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write52
Pulse Factor Units 3000 Char 4 RO
Totalizer 1 Units 3004 Char 4 RO
Pulse Output Units 3016 Char 4 RO
Volume Rate Units 3020 Char 4 RO

Volume Base Rate Units 3024 Char 4 RO
Mass Rate Units 3028 Char 4 RO
Process Temperature Units 3032 Char 4 RO
Velocity Units 3036 Char 4 RO
Power Units 3040 Char 4 RO

Pressure Units 3044 Char 4 RO
Density Units 3048 Char 4 RO
Viscosity Units 3052 Char 4 RO
Enthalpy Units 3056 Char 4 RO
Electronics Temperature Units 3060 Char 4 RO
K Corrected Units 3064 Char 4 RO
148 MI 019-224
Unit Code Registers

Refer to Measurement Unit (EGU) Codes, page 164 for enumerations.
Table 69 - Registers for Unit Code
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write53
Totalizer 1 Unit Code 3300 UInt16 1 RW
Volume Rate Unit Code 3303 UInt16 1 RW
Volume Base Rate Unit Code 3304 UInt16 1 RW
Mass Rate Unit Code 3305 UInt16 1 RW
Process Temperature Unit Code 3306 UInt16 1 RW
Velocity Unit Code 3307 UInt16 1 RW
Power Unit Code 3308 UInt16 1 RW

Pressure Unit Code 3309 UInt16 1 RW
Density Unit Code 3310 UInt16 1 RW
Viscosity Unit Code 3311 UInt16 1 RW
Enthalpy Unit Code 3312 UInt16 1 RW
Electronics Temperature Unit Code 3313 UInt16 1 RW
K Corrected Unit Code 3314 UInt16 1 RW
Status Registers
See Status, page 61 for more information.
Table 70 - Registers for Status
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write53
Totalizer 1 Status 3500 UInt16 1 RO
Pulse Output Status 3503 UInt16 1 RO
Volume Rate Status 3504 UInt16 1 RO

Volume Base Rate Status 3505 UInt16 1 RO
Mass Rate Status 3506 UInt16 1 RO
Process Temperature Status 3507 UInt16 1 RO
Velocity Status 3508 UInt16 1 RO
Power Status 3509 UInt16 1 RO

Pressure Status 3510 UInt16 1 RO
Density Status 3511 UInt16 1 RO
Viscosity Status 3512 UInt16 1 RO
MI 019-224 149
Table 70 - Registers for Status (Continued)
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write54
Enthalpy Status 3513 UInt16 1 RO
Reynolds Status 3514 UInt16 1 RO
Electronics Temperature Status 3515 UInt16 1 RO
K Corrected Status 3516 UInt16 1 RO

S1 Vortex Signal Status 3517 UInt16 1 RO
S4 RTD Ohms Status 3518 UInt16 1 RO

S5 Electronics Temperature Status 3519 UInt16 1 RO
Table 71 - Enumerations for Status
Code Description
0x60 OK
0x61 Input Fixed
0x62 Paused
0x63 Overridden
0x64 Default
0x65 Input Overridden
0x80 Under Soft Lower

0x81 Over Soft Upper
0x82 Input Issue
0x83 Pulse and totals stopped due to a configuration change
0x84 RTD is shorted

0x85 RTD is open
0x86 Override is outside the soft limits

0x87 Offline and Pulse and Totals are stopped
0x88 Using Default Value
0x90 Alert Under Hard Lower

0x91 Alert Over Hard Upper
0x92 Alert Input Bad
0x93 Alert Input turned off by USER
0x94 Alert Input turned off by FACTORY
0x95 Alert Internal Error

0x96 Alert RTD is shorted
0x97 Alert RTD is open
0x98 Alert Override is outside the hard limits

0x99 Alert Measurement not ready
150 MI 019-224
Custom Units Name Registers

Table 72 - Registers for Custom Units Name
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write55
Totalizer 1 Custom Unit Name 4500 Char 4 RW
Pulse Total Custom Unit Name 4512 Char 4 RW
Volume Rate Custom Unit Name 4516 Char 4 RW
Volume Base Rate Custom Unit Name 4520 Char 4 RW
Mass Rate Custom Unit Name 4524 Char 4 RW
Pressure Custom Unit Name 4528 Char 4 RW
Density Custom Unit Name 4532 Char 4 RW
Custom Units Slope Registers

Table 73 - Registers for Custom Units Slope
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write55
Totalizer 1 Custom Unit Slope 4600 Float 2 RW
Pulse Total Custom Unit Slope 4606 Float 2 RW
Volume Rate Custom Unit Slope 4608 Float 2 RW
Volume Base Rate Custom Unit Slope 4610 Float 2 RW
Mass Rate Custom Unit Slope 4612 Float 2 RW
Pressure Custom Unit Slope 4614 Float 2 RW
Density Custom Unit Slope 4616 Float 2 RW
Custom Units Offset Registers

Table 74 - Registers for Custom Units Offset
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write55
Totalizer 1 Custom Unit Offset 4700 Float 2 RW
Pulse Total Custom Unit Offset 4706 Float 2 RW
Volume Rate Custom Unit Offset 4708 Float 2 RW
MI 019-224 151
Table 74 - Registers for Custom Units Offset (Continued)
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write56
Volume Base Rate Custom Unit Offset 4710 Float 2 RW
Mass Rate Custom Unit Offset 4712 Float 2 RW
Pressure Custom Unit Offset 4714 Float 2 RW
Density Custom Unit Offset 4716 Float 2 RW
Alert Strategy Registers

See Measurement Properties, page 62 for more information.
Table 75 - Registers for Alert Strategy
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write56
Totalizer 1 Alert Strategy 5000 UInt16 1 RW
Pulse Output Alert Strategy 5003 UInt16 1 RW
Volume Rate Alert Strategy 5004 UInt16 1 RW
Volume Base Rate Alert Strategy 5005 UInt16 1 RW
Mass Rate Alert Strategy 5006 UInt16 1 RW
Process Temperature Alert Strategy 5007 UInt16 1 RW
Velocity Alert Strategy 5008 UInt16 1 RW
Power Alert Strategy 5009 UInt16 1 RW
Pressure Alert Strategy 5010 UInt16 1 RW
Density Alert Strategy 5011 UInt16 1 RW
Viscosity Alert Strategy 5012 UInt16 1 RW
Enthalpy Alert Strategy 5013 UInt16 1 RW
Reynolds Alert Strategy 5014 UInt16 1 RW
Electronics Temperature Alert Strategy 5015 UInt16 1 RW
S1 Vortex Signal Alert Strategy 5016 UInt16 1 RW
S4 RTD Ohms Alert Strategy 5017 UInt16 1 RW
S5 Electronics Temperature Alert Strategy 5018 UInt16 1 RW
K Corrected Alert Strategy 5019 UInt16 1 RW
Table 76 - Enumerations for Alert Strategy
Code Description
0x00 On Alert Continue

0x01 On Alert Bad
0x02 On Alert use Default
152 MI 019-224
Calculation Method Registers

See Measurement Properties, page 62 for more information.
Table 77 - Registers for Calculation Method
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write57
Pulse Output Calc Method 5500 UInt16 1 RW
Volume Rate Calc Method 5501 UInt16 1 RW

Volume Base Rate Calc Method 5502 UInt16 1 RW
Mass Rate Calc Method 5503 UInt16 1 RW
Process Temperature Calc Method 5504 UInt16 1 RW
Velocity Calc Method 5505 UInt16 1 RW
Power Calc Method 5506 UInt16 1 RW

Pressure Calc Method 5507 UInt16 1 RW
Density Calc Method 5508 UInt16 1 RW
Viscosity Calc Method 5509 UInt16 1 RW
Enthalpy Calc Method 5510 UInt16 1 RW
Reynolds Calc Method 5511 UInt16 1 RW
Electronics Temperature Calc Method 5512 UInt16 1 RW
S4 RTD Ohms Calc Method 5513 UInt16 1 RW

S5 Electronics Temperature Calc Method 5514 UInt16 1 RW
K Corrected Calc Method 5515 UInt16 1 RW

S1 Vortex Signal Calc Method 5516 UInt16 1 RW
Table 78 - Enumerations for Calculation Method
Code Description
0x03 Override
0x04 User Default
0x05 User Off
0x06 User On
0x07 By Remote
Override Registers
Perform only one override at a time. Reset or write a NAN (Not a Number) to clear all
overrides.
Table 79 - Registers for Override
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write57
Totalizer 1 Override 6000 Float 2 WO
MI 019-224 153
Table 79 - Registers for Override (Continued)
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write58
Pulse Output Override 6006 Float 2 WO
Volume Rate Override 6008 Float 2 WO

Mass Rate Override 6012 Float 2 WO
Process Temperature Override 6014 Float 2 WO
Pressure Override 6020 Float 2 WO

Density Override 6022 Float 2 WO
Device Control Registers

Change to this parameter does not take effect until the device is reset.
Table 80 - Registers for Device Control
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write58
Warm Restart 6513 UInt16 1 WO
Modbus Communications Registers

Changes to these parameters do not take effect until the device is reset.
Table 81 - Registers for Modbus Communications
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write58
Station Id 6600 UInt16 1 RW
Baud Rate 6601 UInt16 1 RW
Parity 6602 UInt16 1 RW
Stop Bits 6603 UInt16 1 RW
Byte Format 6604 UInt16 1 RW
Test Register 6605 Float 2 RO
• This read/write register contains the enumeration for the currently configured 32-
bit register byte-swapping format. There are four options:

0: Full swap ABCD → DCBA Big-endian format (default)
1: Word swap ABCD → CDAB Big-endian format, with words swapped
2: Word and byte swap ABCD → BADC Little-endian format, with words swapped
3: No swap ABCD → ABCD Little-endian format
154 MI 019-224
• Test Register, Address 6605

This 4-byte, floating-point register displays the test value 1234.0 when the byte
format of the Modbus master matches that of the device. The master can use this
to verify that the byte-swapping format is set accordingly in the device.
Fluid Configuration Registers

Table 82 - Registers for Fluid Configuration
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write59
Set Fluid Defaults 6900 UInt16 1 WO
Current Fluid Id 6901 UInt16 1 RO
Current Fluid Name 6902 Char 8 RW
Changing the fluid type in the Set Fluid Defaults register stops all totalizers and pulse
output in Pulse/Total Mode. When pulse output in Pulse/Total Mode is stopped, a
PulseStopped alert is returned.
Table 83 - Fluid IDs
Code Description
0x8000 User Liquid
0x8001 User Gas

0x8002 User Vapor
0x8004 Saturated Steam

0x8005 Superheated Steam
Density Thermal Compensation Registers

See Fluid Parameters, page 68 for more information.
Table 84 - Registers for Density Thermal Compensation
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write59
Density Thermo Coefficient 7000 Float 2 RW
Density Thermo Offset Temp 7002 Float 2 RW
Density Thermo Offset 7004 Float 2 RW
Viscosity Thermal Compensation Registers

MI 019-224 155
Table 85 - Registers for Viscosity Thermal Compensation
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write60
Viscosity Thermo Coefficient 7100 Float 2 RW
Viscosity Thermo Offset Temp 7102 Float 2 RW
Viscosity Thermo Offset 7104 Float 2 RW
Base Parameters Registers

Table 86 - Registers for Base Parameters
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write60
Base Density 7500 Float 2 RW
Base Temperature 7502 Float 2 RW
Base Pressure 7504 Float 2 RW
Totalizer/Pulse Control Registers

Table 87 - Registers for Totalizer/Pulse Control
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write60
Totalizer 1 Action 8000 UInt16 1 RW
Pulse Output Control 8003 UInt16 1 RW
Table 88 - Totalizer/Pulse Actions
Code Description
0x00 Off
0x01 On
0x02 Resume
0x03 Reset
Pulse Output Mode Configuration Registers

Table 89 - Registers for Pulse Output Mode
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write60
Pulse Output Mode 8200 UInt16 1 RW
156 MI 019-224
Table 90 - Enumerations for Pulse Output Mode
Code Description
0x00 None
0x01 Raw
0x03 Frequency
0x04 Pulse
Totalizer Configuration Registers

See Setting Totalizer Parameters, page 73 for more information.
Configure only one totalizer at a time. If you attempt to set multiple mappings at the
same time, the command does not execute successfully.
Table 91 - Registers for Totalizer Configuration
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write61
Totalizer 1 Map 8100 UInt16 1 RW
Table 92 - Enumerations for Totalizer/Pulse Mapping
Code Description
0x01 Volume
0x02 Base Volume
0x07 Mass
0x41 Vortex Count
0x0D Energy
Pulse Total Configuration Registers

See Configuring Pulse Output, page 77 for more information.
See Enumerations for Totalizer/Pulse Mapping, page 157.
Changing the source map for pulse output, pulse/total mode in the Pulse Total
Output Map register returns a SetToNearest alert if the existing Pulse Total Min
Width or Pulse Total Factor are adjusted in order to achieve a valid configuration.
Table 93 - Registers for Pulse Total Configuration
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write61
Pulse Factor Unit Code 8300 UInt16 1 RW
Pulse Total Output Map 8301 UInt16 1 RW
Pulse Total Factor UP 8302 Float 2 RW
MI 019-224 157
Table 93 - Registers for Pulse Total Configuration (Continued)
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write62
Pulse Total Min Width 8304 Float 2 RW
Pulse Total Factor PU 8306 Float 2 RW
Pulse Frequency Configuration Registers

See Configuring Pulse Output, page 77 for more information.
See Enumerations for Totalizer/Pulse Mapping, page 157.
Table 94 - Registers for Pulse Frequency Configuration
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write62
Pulse Frequency Output Map 8400 UInt16 1 RW
Pulse Frequency Min Freq 8401 Float 2 RW
Pulse Frequency Max Freq 8403 Float 2 RW
Pulse Frequency Offline Freq 8405 Float 2 RW
Self Test Registers

Table 95 - Registers for Self Test
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write62
SelfTestResult 8501 UInt16 1 RW
Calibration Registers
Table 96 - Registers for Calibration
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write62
RTD Calibration Value 9000 Float 2 WO
Primary Time In Service 9002 UInt16 1 RO
User Time In Service 9003 UInt16 1 RO
158 MI 019-224
Modbus Status Registers

Table 97 - Registers for Modbus Status
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write63
Configuration Change Counter 9500 UInt16 1 RO
Last Configuration Access Return Code 9501 UInt16 1 RO
Detailed Return Code 9502 UInt16 1 RO

Configuration Access Specific Info 9503 UInt16 1 RO
Malfunction Code 9504 UInt16 1 RO
MI 019-224 159
For return codes not listed in the next table, contact Global Customer Support.
Table 98 - Detailed Return Codes for Register 9502
Code Description
0x60 OK
0x62 Bad Data Size
0x66 Invalid Partial Value
0x6D Engineering Units Code Not Found
0x6E Engineering Units Code Not Allowed
0x6F Set To Nearest Value

0x70 Below Soft Limit
0x71 Above Soft Limit
0x74 Device Is Busy
0x75 Invalid Selection

0x76 Write Protected
0x77 LRV Equals URV
0x78 URV Too Low

0x79 URV Too High
0x7A LRV Too Low

0x7B LRV Too High
0x7C Both (URV and LRV) Out Of Range
0x7D Bad Mode

0x7E Value Too Big
0x7F Value Too Small

0x80 Invalid Measurement Block; Invalid Measurement
0x81 Access Restricted

0x86 Span Too Small
0x87 Invalid Date Code Detected

0x88 Invalid Mode Selection
0x89 Invalid Pulse Frequency
0x91 Heartbeat Frequency Is Too Small
0x92 Heartbeat Frequency Has Been Changed
0x93 New Pulses Seen

0x98 Changes Not Allowed When Pulse Or Total Is On
0x9A Invalid Device Variable Number

0x9B Invalid Measurement Calculation Method
0x9C Invalid Measurement Error Strategy
0xA1 Pulse Output Frequency Span Too Small
0xA2 Pulse Output Maximum Frequency Too Big
160 MI 019-224
Table 98 - Detailed Return Codes for Register 9502 (Continued)
Code Description
0xA6 Pulse Output Pulse Factor Set To Nearest Value
0xA8 Block Not Available

0xA9 URV > URL Caused Rerange
0xAA Changes Not Allowed While Measurement Is Mapped To Pulse Output Or Totalizer
0xAB Current Conditions Indicate Liquid Water Is Present
LFCI Registers
Table 99 - Registers for LFCI
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write64
Auto LFCI Status 10500 UInt16 1 RO
Unit Code 10501 UInt16 1 RW
LFCI Level 10502 UInt16 1 RW
LFCI1 Value 10503 Float 2 RO
Tube Serial Number Registers

Table 100 - Registers for Tube Serial Number
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write64
Tube Serial Number 11000 Char 8 RW
K Reference Registers
Table 101 - Registers for K Reference
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write64
K Reference Write 11500 Float 2 WO
K Reference Read 11502 Float 2 RO
MI 019-224 161
Information Registers
Table 102 - Registers for Info
Type Regis- Read/

Name Address
ters Write65
Long Tag 12000 Char 16 RW
Coils
Coils are available for controlling options, synchronous functions, and asynchronous
tasks.
Use the addresses in this table with Modbus commands 1 (Read Coils) and 5 (Write
Single Coil).
Table 103 - Coil Registers
Read/ Type Description

Name Address
Write65
User Time In Service Clear 100 RW Synchronous Write On to clear
Noise Reduction 101 RW Sync. On/Off On/Off
Adaptive Filtering 102 RW Sync. On/Off On/Off
Reynolds Correction 103 RW Sync. On/Off On/Off
Run RTD Calibration 104 RW Synchronous See RTD Calibration Procedure, page 163
Restore Factory RTD Calibration 105 RW Synchronous Write On to restore
User Self Test 106 RW Asynchronous See User Self Test Procedure, page 163
Perform Auto LFCI 107 RW Asynchronous See Auto LFCI Procedure, page 164
Examples
Where xx = station ID and yyy = coil address:
• Write Single Coil On (command 5): xx0500yyyFF00
• Write Single Coil Off (command 5): xx0500yyy0000
• Read Coil (command 1): xx0100yyy0001
Synchronous On/Off Option Coils

Reads from these coils return the current option state:
• Read with setting On, Coil=1 (On)
• Read with setting Off, Coil=0 (Off)
Writes to these coils set the option state:
• Write ON sets Coil=1, Option=On
• Write OFF sets Coil=0, Option=Off
162 MI 019-224
If the setting is not allowed, the coil write does not change the coil state, and the write
returns as unsuccessful. The return code and information field are stored in the
Modbus status.
If the option is set successfully, the coil is set to reflect the option state, and the write is
successful.
Synchronous Function Coils

Reads from these coils return the last written state: 0=Off, 1=On.
Writes to these coils control the function:
• Write On sets Coil=1, run function
• Write Off sets Coil=0, no other action
If not allowed, writing On causes the coil state to be set to Off, and the write returns as
unsuccessful. The return code and information field are stored in the Modbus status.
If the function runs successfully, the coil is set to On, and the write is successful.
Asynchronous Task Coils

Asynchronous task coils control a specific asynchronous task. Reads from these coils
return the current state of the task.
• Read with function inactive, Coil=0 (Off)
• Read with function active, Coil=1 (On)
Writes to these coils invoke the task as follows:
• Write On with coil Off, start function and set Coil=On
• Write Off with coil Off, no effect (Coil remains Off)
• Write On or Off with coil On, no effect (Coil remains On)
Reading one of these coils returns the current status (Active=1, Inactive=0). Each self-
test coil reports Active if any self-test is active.
Writing one of these coils attempts to start the task. If the task is already active or is
unable to start, the coil write leaves the coil state unchanged, the task does not start,
and the write returns as unsuccessful. The return code and information field are
stored in the Modbus status.
If the task starts successfully, the coil write state changes from Off to On, and the write
is successful.
RTD Calibration Procedure

1. Place a known temperature value in register RTD Calibration Value.
2. Write On to the coil.
User Self Test Procedure

1. Write On to start.
2. The display reads On while in progress.
3. The display reads Off when finished.
MI 019-224 163
4. Check the Self Test Result register to verify the result:

0=Unsuccessful or not run; 1=Run and passed.
Auto LFCI Procedure

1. Write On to start.
2. The display reads On while in progress.
3. The display reads Off when finished.
4. Check the Auto LFCI Status register to verify the result: 0x93=Unsuccessful;
0x60=OK.
Measurement Unit (EGU) Codes

Table 104 - Absolute Pressure Measurement Unit Codes
Unit Description Code

psia pounds per square inch absolute 0x0300
kPaa kilopascals absolute 0x0308
Paa pascals absolute 0x0309
— Custom 0x03FF
Table 105 - Temperature Measurement Unit Codes

degC degrees Celsius 0x0600
K Kelvins 0x0601
degF degrees Fahrenheit 0x0602
degR degrees Rankine 0x0603
Table 106 - Density Measurement Unit Codes

kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter 0x0800
g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter 0x0801
oz/in3 ounces per cubic inch 0x0802
lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot 0x0803
lb/Yd3 pounds per cubic yard 0x0804
LT/Yd3 long tons per cubic yard 0x0805
ST/Yd3 short tons per cubic yard 0x0806
lb/gal pounds per US gallon 0x0807
kg/l kilograms per liter 0x0808
— Custom 0x08FF
164 MI 019-224
Table 107 - Mass Rate Measurement Unit Codes

g/s grams per second 0x0904
g/m grams per minute 0x0905
g/h grams per hour 0x0906
g/d grams per day 0x0907
oz/s ounces per second 0x0912
oz/m ounces per minute 0x0913
oz/h ounces per hour 0x0914
oz/d ounces per day 0x0915
kg/s kilograms per second 0x0900
kg/m kilograms per minute 0x0901
kg/h kilograms per hour 0x0902
kg/d kilograms per day 0x0903
lb/s pounds per second 0x0908
lb/m pounds per minute 0x0909
lb/h pounds per hour 0x090A
lb/d pounds per day 0x090B
mTon/s metric tons per second 0x0916
mTon/m metric tons per minute 0x0917
mTon/h metric tons per hour 0x090C
mTon/d metric tons per day 0x090D
STon/s short tons (2000 lb) per second 0x090E
STon/m short tons (2000 lb) per minute 0x090F
STon/h short tons (2000 lb) per hour 0x0910
STon/d short tons (2000 lb) per day 0x0911
LTon/m long tons (2240 lb) per minute 0x0919
LTon/h long tons (2240 lb) per hour 0x091A
LTon/d long tons (2240 lb) per day 0x091B
— Custom 0x09FF
Table 108 - Volume Rate Measurement Unit Codes

bbl/s barrels (42 US gallons) per second 0x0A2A
bbl/m barrels (42 US gallons) per minute 0x0A2B
bbl/h barrels (42 US gallons) per hour 0x0A2C
bbl/d barrels (42 US gallons) per day 0x0A2D
bbl3/s barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second 0x0A26
bbl3/m barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute 0x0A27
bbl3/h barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour 0x0A28
MI 019-224 165
Table 108 - Volume Rate Measurement Unit Codes (Continued)

bbl3/d barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day 0x0A29
ft3/s cubic feet per second 0x0A22
ft3/m cubic feet per minute 0x0A23
ft3/h cubic feet per hour 0x0A24
ft3/d cubic feet per day 0x0A25
gal/s US gallons per second 0x0A16
gal/m US gallons per minute 0x0A17
gal/h US gallons per hour 0x0A18
gal/d US gallons per day 0x0A19
Igal/s imperial gallons per second 0x0A32
Igal/m imperial gallons per minute 0x0A33
Igal/h imperial gallons per hour 0x0A34
Igal/d imperial gallons per day 0x0A35
l/s liters per second 0x0A1C
l/m liters per minute 0x0A1D
l/h liters per hour 0x0A1E
l/d liters per day 0x0A1F
m3/s cubic meters per second 0x0A12
m3/m cubic meters per minute 0x0A13
m3/h cubic meters per hour 0x0A14
m3/d cubic meters per day 0x0A15
mcft/d thousands of cubic feet per day 0x0A4A
mmcft/d millions of cubic feet per day 0x0A4B
Ml/h millions of liters per hour 0x0A20
Ml/d millions of liters per day 0x0A21
Mgal/d millions of US gallons per day 0x0A1B
— Custom 0x0AFF
Table 109 - Standard Volume Rate Measurement Unit Codes

Sbbl/s standard barrels (42 US gallons) per second 0x0B3E
Sbbl/m standard barrels (42 US gallons) per minute 0x0B3F
Sbbl/h standard barrels (42 US gallons) per hour 0x0B40
Sbbl/d standard barrels (42 US gallons) per day 0x0B41
Sbl3/s standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second 0x0B3A
Sbl3/m standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute 0x0B3B
Sbl3/h standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour 0x0B3C
Sbl3/d standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day 0x0B3D
166 MI 019-224
Table 109 - Standard Volume Rate Measurement Unit Codes (Continued)

Sft3/s standard cubic feet per second (US system) 0x0B32
Sft3/m standard cubic feet per minute (US system) 0x0B33
Sft3/h standard cubic feet per hour (US system) 0x0B34
Sft3/d standard cubic feet per day (US system) 0x0B35
Sgal/s standard US gallons per second 0x0B36
Sgal/m standard US gallons per minute 0x0B37
Sgal/h standard US gallons per hour 0x0B38
Sgal/d standard US gallons per day 0x0B39
Sm3/s standard cubic meters per second 0x0B2E
Sm3/m standard cubic meters per minute 0x0B2F
Sm3/h standard cubic meters per hour 0x0B30
Sm3/d standard cubic meters per day 0x0B31
mScft/d thousands of standard cubic feet per day 0x0B4C
mmScft/d millions of standard cubic feet per day 0x0B4D
— Custom 0x0BFF
Table 110 - Normal Volume Rate Measurement Unit Codes

Ngal/s normal US gallons per second 0x0C36
Ngal/m normal US gallons per minute 0x0C37
Ngal/h normal US gallons per hour 0x0C38
Ngal/d normal US gallons per day 0x0C39
Nl/s normal liters per second (MKS System) 0x0C42
Nl/m normal liters per minute (MKS System) 0x0C43
Nl/h normal liters per hour (MKS System) 0x0C44
Nl/d normal liters per day (MKS System) 0x0C45
Nm3/s normal cubic meters per second (MKS System) 0x0C46
Nm3/m normal cubic meters per minute (MKS System) 0x0C47
Nm3/h normal cubic meters per hour (MKS System) 0x0C48
Nm3/d normal cubic meters per day (MKS System) 0x0C49
Nft3/s normal cubic feet per second 0x0C4A
— Custom 0x0CFF
Table 111 - Mass Measurement Unit Codes

kg kilograms 0x0E00
g grams 0x0E01
lb pounds 0x0E02
oz ounces 0x0E03
MI 019-224 167
Table 111 - Mass Measurement Unit Codes (Continued)

mTon metric tons 0x0E04
STon short tons (2000 lb) 0x0E05
LTon long tons (2240 lb) 0x0E06
— Custom 0x0EFF
Table 112 - Volume Measurement Unit Codes

m3 cubic meters 0x1000
ft3 cubic feet 0x1002
l liters 0x1003
Ml millions of liters 0x1004
bbl3 liquid barrels (31.5 US gallons) 0x1005
bbl liquid barrels (42 US gallons) 0x1006
gal gallons 0x1007
Mgal millions of US gallons 0x1008
Igal imperial gallons 0x100C
mcft thousands of cubic feet 0x100D

mmcft millions of cubic feet 0x100E
— Custom 0x10FF
Table 113 - Standard Volume Measurement Unit Codes

Sm3 standard cubic meters 0x1100
Sft3 standard cubic feet 0x1101
SBL3 standard liquid barrel (31.5 U.S. gallons) 0x1102
SBBL standard liquid barrel (42 U.S. gallons) 0x1103
Sgal standard US gallons 0x1104
mScft thousands of cubic feet 0x110D

mmScft millions of cubic feet 0x110E
— Custom 0x11FF
Table 114 - Normal Volume Measurement Unit Codes

Nm3 normal cubic meters (MKS System) 0x1200
Nft3 normal cubic feet 0x1201

Nl normal liters (MKS System) 0x1202
Ngal normal US gallons 0x1203
— Custom 0x12FF
168 MI 019-224
Table 115 - Velocity Measurement Unit Codes

m/s meters per second 0x1400
m/m meters per minute 0x1401
m/h meters per hour 0x1402
m/d meters per day 0x1403
ft/s feet per second 0x1405
ft/m feet per minute 0x1406
ft/h feet per hour 0x1407
ft/d feet per day 0x1408
Table 116 - Absolute Viscosity Measurement Unit Codes

PaSec pascal seconds 0x1500
cPoise centipoise 0x1501
Table 117 - Heat Content Measurement Unit Codes

J/kg joules per kilogram 0x2100
KJ/kg kilojoules per kilogram 0x2101
BTU/lb British thermal units per pound 0x2102
MCal/kg megacalories per kilogram 0x2103
Table 118 - Energy Measurement Unit Codes

J joules 0x1B00
MJ megajoules 0x1B01
BTU British thermal units 0x1B02

MCal megacalories 0x1B03
Table 119 - Heat Flow Measurement Unit Codes

J/s joules per second 0x1C00
MJ/h megajoules per hour 0x1C01
BTU/h British thermal units per hour 0x1C02
MCal/h megacalories per hour 0x1C03
Table 120 - K-Factor Measurement Unit Codes

m3/p cubic meters per pulse 0x1D00
p/l pulses per liter 0x1D02
p/ft3 pulses per cubic foot 0x1D03
MI 019-224 169
Table 121 - Miscellaneous Measurement Unit Codes
Measurement Unit Description Code

Potential Volt volts 0x1900
Resistance ohms ohms 0x1A00
Frequency Hz hertz 0x1F00
Pulse Pulse pulses 0x2000
170 MI 019-224
Modbus RTU Display Instructions Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Modbus RTU Display Instructions

Overview
By writing to certain registers, the connected master RTU can send information to the
Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter and show it on the local display. There are a maximum
of 15 items that can be shown on the local display. An item is a set of three lines of
text that are displayed at once.
The top and bottom line of each item can each show 16 characters of text. The middle
line can show eight characters of text.
The middle line can display two different types of items. 2 of the 15 items can display
8 characters of ASCII text on the middle line. The reamaining 13 items can display a
decimal value on the middle line.
Any combination of the 15 items can be enabled or disabled individually (see RTU
Item Enable/Disable, page 171).
RTU Item Enable/Disable

Use coils 129-143 (see relevant coils below) to enable or disable RTU items 1 through
15. Writing “off” disables the item and “on” enables the item. When all 15 items are off,
the RTU display mode is deactivated and the local display behaves normally, showing
the measurements being reported by the flowmeter. When at least one of the items
are enabled, the local display will be in RTU display mode.
In RTU display mode, the measurement display section of the menu will be replaced
with the RTU display items. Depending on whether scan is enabled or not with coil
128, the RTU items will cycle through on the display approximately every 6 seconds or
only change when the up/down buttons are pressed.
The enable/disable state of the RTU items, as well as the scan setting, are persistent
across power cycles. If the power is cycled, then the text and value need to be
rewritten to all the active RTU items or else they will appear in an uninitialized state. A
meter in RTU display mode can be reset to the normal measurement display mode
from the local display using the ClrRTU option under the 1 Setup > 2 Advance >
3 ClrRTU selection.
NOTE: Enabling or disabling any RTU item causes a configuration change, and all
text and values of the RTU items must be rewritten.
Relevant Coils
Name Address Type Registers Read Write
RTU Item 1 Enable 129 bit Coil True True

MI 019-224 171
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Display Instructions

RTU Item with No Data (Uninitialized State)

An enabled RTU Item with no information contained in the registers will appear on the
screen with 3 dots on the top line, 3 dots on the bottom line, and 8 dashes across the
middle line.
RTU Scan Enable/Disable

When more than one RTU item is active, there are two ways to show multiple items on
the display. This is controlled by coil 128.
• If coil 128 is on, the display cycles through all the active RTU items at a rate of
about six seconds.
• If coil 128 is off, you can view the individual items in turn by pressing either the up
or down buttons on the front panel.
NOTE: Changing the scan setting causes a configuration change, and all text and
values of the RTU items must be rewritten.
Relevant Coil
RTU Item Scan 128 bit Coil True True
RTU Default Item

Register 6164 is for specifying where to start in the list of 15 items when the RTU
display mode is activated. The default value is 1 and corresponds to RTU item 1. If the
value of register 6164 is set to 5, and all RTU items are activated at once, RTU item 5
will appear first. If the default item is not active, then the first active RTU item will be
displayed first.
For example, if the default value is set to 5 but only RTU items 1, 9 and 12 are active,
then item 1 will appear first.
172 MI 019-224
RTU Item Text

There are 15 contiguous blocks of 16 registers each, starting at register 6165. These
are for writing the top and bottom lines of an RTU item. The first eight registers are for
the top line, and the second eight registers are for the bottom line. All 16 registers
must be written at the same time. The top and bottom lines cannot be changed
individually.
The data in these registers do not persist through a power cycle. It is recommended
that you periodically rewrite the text. This rate of refresh can and should be much less
frequent than updating the values in the middle line, which should be done as often as
needed to keep the data current when it is displayed.
For example, if all 15 items are active, a value only needs to be updated about every
6*15 = 90 seconds to be active when it comes up every time in the scan cycle order.
Relevant Registers
RTU Item 1 Text 6165 char 16 False True

Example
To set up RTU item 5 so that it displays the word “Example” on top line of the display
and “Of RTU Item Text” on the bottom line of the display, write the following hex bytes
to the 16 registers, starting at 6229:
Register Byte ASCII Chars
6229 0x4578 Ex
6230 0x616d am
6231 0x706c pl
6232 0x6520 e (space)
6233 0x2020 (space)(space)
MI 019-224 173
6237 0x4f66 Of
6238 0x2052 (space)R
6239 0x5455 TU
6240 0x2049 (space)I
(6241 0x7465 te
6242 0x6d20 m(space)
6243 0x5465 Te
6244 0x7874 xt
If coil 133 for RTU item 5 is enabled, then the screen appears like this:
NOTE:
• On the top line there is a R in the last character to the right. This always
appears on the top line and is an indication that you are viewing an RTU item
instead of a measurement from the meter. It also reduces the number of
ASCII characters that can display on the top line to 15. The 16th character of
the top line is ignored.
• No value was written to registers 6417 and 6418. These are the two registers
for the decimal value for RTU item 5. When there is no value to display, the
middle line is just eight dashes. This is useful as you can use the decimal
RTU items to just display text if you have no need to display a decimal value
for the information coming from the RTU. For the ASCII RTU items 1 and 2,
the behavior is the same. If no value is written to the middle line registers, the
middle line appears as dashes.
Writing an ASCII RTU Item

RTU items 1 and 2 show eight characters of ASCII text on the middle line. The text
displayed in the middle line is determined by the four registers starting at 6405 for
RTU item 1 and the four registers starting at 6409 for RTU item 2.
6405 0x4578 Ex
6406 0x616d am
6407 0x706c pl
6408 0x6520 e (space)
If “Example” is written to the four registers starting at 6405, the middle line appears as
below:
174 MI 019-224
Relevant Registers
RTU Item 1 Value 6405 char 4 False True

RTU Item 2 Value 6409 char 4 False True
Writing a Decimal RTU

RTU items 3 through 15 show a decimal value on the middle line. The value displayed
is determined by the single precision floating point value written to the two registers.
For example, for RTU item 3, the floating point value is to be written to registers 6413
and 6414. For RTU item 4, it is 6415 and 6416 and so forth, all the way to RTU item
15.
To write “100” to RTU item 3, write the following data to the two registers:
100.0 = 0x42c80000
NOTE: The default format is big-endian.
Register Byte
6413 0x42c8
6414 0x0000
Relevant Registers
RTU Item 3 Value 6413 float 2 False True

Display Format
Like the meter-calculated measurement values, the display format of the decimal RTU
items can be changed. The 13 registers for controlling this start at 6150.
The following show the enumerations of the display formats:
MI 019-224 175
Byte Display Format
0x0001 XXXXXXXX
0x0002 XXXXXX.X
0x0003 XXXXX.XX
0x0004 XXXX.XXX
0x0005 XXX.XXXX
0x0006 XX.XXXXX
0x0007 X.XXXXXX
0x0008 XXXXeXXX
NOTE: The AutoFormat display format is not supported for RTU items.
Relevant Registers
RTU Item 3 Display Format 6150 Unit 16 1 False True
RTU Item 10 Display 6157 Unit 16 1 False True

Format
Format
Format
Format
Format
Format
Additional Information
Because of a limitation of the display, only two lines of text can be written at once. You
will see this effect when an RTU item is changed on the display. First, the top and
bottom lines are written and then a second or so later, the middle line is written. This
will create an inconsistency briefly in the display when changing items. The top and
bottom lines of the next item will appear, but the middle line will show the value from
the previous item for a moment before updating to the current value.
Because the top and bottom text registers are large (16 registers), you can only write
the text for seven RTU items at once.
That is, 7 * 16 registers * 2 bytes = 224 bytes.
176 MI 019-224
Similarly, eight RTU items would be 256 bytes (8 * 16 registers * 2 bytes = 256) and
that is too much data for a single Modbus RTU command.
MI 019-224 177
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting the flowmeter, verify that the flowmeter has been configured
with the correct model, flow, and output parameters. If there is a problem, the display
indicates W:Input (warning), B:Input (bad), or CfgErr (configuration error, such as
RTD Open).
Loss of Signal Warning
WARNING
HAZARD OF FLOWMETER CORROSION OR WEAR
If the flowrate signal appears to have a calibration shift or goes to zero, check the
flowmeter for corrosion or wear.
equipment damage.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Components in your flowmeter are ESD-sensitive, and thus are susceptible to
damage resulting from electrostatic discharge. When performing maintenance in
the electronics compartment or remote junction box, or when working with the
housing cover removed, ground yourself with a conductive wrist strap or stand on
an ESD mat.
Transmitter Does Not Respond

The transmitter may be in Listen Only Mode. Refer to Listen Only Mode, page 145.
Output Indicates Flow When There Is No Flow

In some installations, the flowmeter can indicate flow when the line is shut down. This
could be the effect of a leaking valve, sloshing fluid, or vibrational noise sources such
as pumps.
• Check the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI) setting.
The LFCI setting determines the sensitivity of the electronics to the sensor output
signal. There are eight LFCI settings. The default is level 4, which is suitable for
most applications. Should there be excessive vibration, resulting in false
excitation of the vortex sensor, it may be necessary to increase the LFCI setting.
Refer to Setting the LFCI, page 183.
178 MI 019-224
Troubleshooting Model 84C with Modbus Communication
• If the LFCI is higher than desired, there are several possible causes:
◦ Check the flowmeter sizing. The flowmeter could be too big for the application,
resulting in the need to provide a measurement at a very low flow velocity.
Refer to FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application, page 21 to validate meter sizing.
◦ Check for excessive vibration. For most applications where the electronics are
top mounted and the pipe has horizontal pipe supports, lateral vibration of the
pipes may result in false signal. Reposition the meter so that the electronics
are at approximately the 3 o’clock or 4 o’clock position (see Sensor Mounting
to Minimize the Effect of Vibration, page 37). The sensor axis is then
perpendicular to the vibration.
◦ Examine peripheral equipment and potential vibration sources to be sure that
they are not imparting vibration into the flowmeter.
• Other sources of false signal:
◦ Check for 60 Hz signal pickup. Check the output of the flowmeter against the
expected value for a 60 Hz input signal. If 60 Hz interference is present,
examine the flowmeter and interconnecting wiring for proper grounding and
shielding.
◦ If the flowmeter is remotely mounted, verify that the remote cable is properly
terminated. The cable was properly terminated at the factory. If the cable was
shortened, check the termination. See Remotely Mounted Electronics, page
52.
NOTE: If you must shorten the cable, shorten it from the flowtube end
only.
No Output with Flow

If a flowmeter has no or low output during flow conditions, follow these troubleshooting
steps.
The Display (if Applicable) Is Blank

1. Remove the field wiring cover and check the power supply voltage. The voltage
across the + and - terminals must be between 9 and 30 V dc.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the termination compartment. Moisture could
be a result of a loose cable/conduit connection, or a cover that is not fully
engaged.
3. If voltage at the terminals is 0, check for a blown fuse in the power supply, or
damaged wires.
4. If voltage is correct, check the voltage on the cable inside the housing to verify
that the protection circuit in the terminal block assembly has not been damaged.
If no voltage is present on the cable inside the housing, replace the terminal block
assembly.
There Is a Low Output Signal (and a Lighted Display, if Applicable)

1. Check the LFCI setting. This sets the point below which flow is not measured.
If flow is greater than this level, and there is still no change in output, continue to
the next step.
2. Check the pulse output default value, if applicable.
MI 019-224 179
No or Low Output with Remotely Mounted Electronics

If a flowmeter with remotely mounted electronics has no or low output during flow
conditions, follow these troubleshooting steps.
1. Inspect the preamplifier for discoloration, which could be the result of
overheating. Check the maximum ambient temperature specification in the
electrical certification table (see Electrical Certifications, page 27) and/or the
flowmeter’s data label.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the termination compartment. Moisture could
be a result of a loose cable/conduit connection or a cover that was not fully
engaged.
3. Check the voltage levels at the junction box on top of the flowmeter body.
The following values should be observed:
• Red to yellow: +3.0 ±0.3 V
• Orange to yellow: -3.0 ±0.3 V
If these values are not observed, there may be a break or cut in the cable
between the flowmeter and the remote electronics. Or, the preamplifier may not
be working.
4. Verify that the wires are fully engaged in the connectors. Lightly tug each wire to
verify that it is firmly held in place by the connector, on the metal conductor and
not on the wire insulation. If any wires are not engaged, press the lever in the
connector, insert the bare conductor, and release the lever, checking again that
the wire is firmly clamped.
5. Check for sensor output using a small portable scope meter. There should be a
sinelike waveform on the meter. This waveform does not have to be sinusoidal,
but it should show alternating output. The amplitude of the signal depends on the
sensor type and velocity. The frequency of the output should be in accordance
with the expected flow rate.
180 MI 019-224
6. Check the preamplifier:

a. Disconnect the sensor leads.
b. For a standard temperature sensor, connect a 2200 pF ±5% 50 V NPO
ceramic capacitor to the brown (+) terminal of the sensor terminal block.
c. For an extended temperature sensor, replace the 2200 pF capacitor with a
22 pF capacitor. Set the frequency input amplitude to 0.5 V peak-to-peak.
The output from the preamplifier should be 1.5x the input value, or 0.75 V
peak-to-peak, and be at the same frequency as the input.
d. Connect a portable frequency generator that can supply a sinusoidal 0.5 V
peak-to-peak signal to the sensor input terminals.
e. Identify the expected sensor frequency for the flow rate going through the
flowmeter. Use the FlowExpertPro™ sizing program to determine this, or
compute the frequency based on the K-factor stamped on the flowmeter
body.
f. Recheck the output at the remote electronics.
• If there is output at the electronics, the sensor may need to be replaced.
• If there is no output at the remote electronics, check the preamplifier by
disconnecting the blue and yellow wires from the remote cable. (The
orange and red wires should stay connected, as they provide power to
the preamplifier.) Connect the scope meter to the blue and yellow (+ and
-) terminals on the output terminal block. The amplitude of the signal
should be approximately the same (0.5 V) as the input signal, and the
same frequency.
g. If the output from the preamplifier is correct:
• Inspect the cable for breaks and cuts.
• Verify that the remote cable is correctly connected to the junction box at
the flowmeter.
The remote cable is factory-terminated and sealed at the electronics
end. The cable cannot be removed or re-terminated at the electronics
end. If the cable was tampered with at the electronics end, this is likely
the root cause of the improperly working flowmeter. Replace the cable.
See Preparing the Remote Signal Cable, page 52.
h. If the flowmeter still has no output, proceed to Testing the Electronics
Module, page 181.
Testing the Electronics Module

Refer to Replacing the Electronics Module, page 187 for detailed instructions on
removing and replacing the electronics module.
1. Remove the electronics compartment cover at the remote electronics.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the electronics compartment. Moisture can be
the result of a loose cable/conduit connection, or a cover that was not fully
engaged. Buildup of corrosive moisture in this compartment may affect the
performance of the electronics.
3. Examine the electronics for exposure to excessive heat. The maximum
temperature the electronics can withstand is 80°C (176°F). Make sure the
installation is such that the electronics do not exceed this temperature.
MI 019-224 181
4. Test the output by putting the flowmeter in Test mode and setting the output
value.
– If the meter has no output in test mode, replace the module.
– If there is output from the meter, continue to the next step.
5. Remove the electronics module from the compartment by loosening the two
captured screws.
6. Check inside for broken or pinched wires, or connectors that are not engaged.
7. Check the voltage level at the cable end of the blue and red wires. The voltage
should be the same as was measured on the field terminals. If there is a
difference, the terminal block electronics assembly may have been damaged in a
severe transient, such as a lightning strike.
8. Remove the 4-wire connector from the back of the electronics module. This is the
signal input connector from the sensor to the electronics module. In place of this
connector, use a test connector (part number K0152KU).
9. Connect a frequency generator to the brown (+) and yellow (-) wires. Inject a
sinusoidal 0.5 V peak-to-peak signal that is in the vortex shedding frequency
range for the flowmeter. Look for a change in the output signal (in Frequency
mode). Change the input frequency over the expected vortex frequency range
and verify the output changes accordingly.
10. If there is still no output, replace the electronics module.
Other Incorrect Output

Output Is Less Than Expected at All Flow Rates
• Verify that the upper range value (URV) is correct.
• Verify that the zero and span of the output are correct.
• Check for vibration levels that might influence the output signal. Refer to Setting
the LFCI, page 183.
• Check the flowmeter configuration to verify that the fluid flowing density is entered
correctly. Incorrect configuration can result in band pass filters being set to
improper values, with in-band signals being adversely affected.
• Check the load resistance.
• In the test mode, verify that the output at the receivers is correct.
Output Is Less Than Expected at Low Flow Rates

If the problem appears only at low flow rates, there may be a pulsating flow condition,
resulting in missed pulses when the fluid velocity is very low.
the LFCI, page 183.
182 MI 019-224
Output Is Constant When Flow Is Increasing or Decreasing

This condition may result from an in-band noise source overriding the vortex signal.
Check the LFCI setting procedure (refer to Setting the LFCI, page 183). Verify that the
URV is in line with the actual measurement range.
Output Is Greater Than Expected

the LFCI, page 183.
• Verify that the flowmeter is not in a failsafe mode, where full-scale output has
been configured as the failsafe output condition.
• Verify that the URV is correctly configured.
Incorrect Pulse Output Value

1. Verify the configuration of the pulse output:
• Raw Pulse: The raw vortex shedding frequency.
• Frequency Mode: Verify that the pulse is configured to the correct full range
value of 10 Hz, 100 Hz, or 1000 Hz.
• Pulse Mode: Verify that Pulse Output, Pulse Mode is properly defined.
2. If pulse output is configured for Frequency Mode, set the output frequency in the
test mode and verify the correct value.
Setting the LFCI

Take these steps to set the Low-Flow Cut-In (LFCI).
1. To determine the magnitude of any false excitation, set damping to 0 seconds.
2. Make sure there is a no-flow condition. Preferably, block valves should be closed.
(Control valves can leak when closed, resulting in some flow that the flowmeter
can detect.)
3. Increase the LFCI setting by one level and observe the signal output. Increase
the LFCI again until there is no false signal.
Alternatively, you can use the automatic LFCI selection function (1Cal/Tst >
2 Calib > 3CalLFCI). When this command is executed, the flowmeter starts at the
most sensitive LFCI setting. If a false signal is detected within a fixed period, the
LFCI increases to the next level, and so on until a level is reached where there is
no false signal. See Automatic LFCI Selection, page 88.
4. If damping was changed to 0 seconds, restore it to the desired level.
MI 019-224 183
5. If you changed the LFCI level, make sure controllers and receivers can
accommodate the increased LFCI setting.
Troubleshooting the Temperature Sensor

The RTD temperature sensor is integral to the vortex sensor in the flowmeter. To
troubleshoot the temperature measurement, take these steps:
1. Make sure the model code is entered correctly.
2. Check the sensor wiring.
3. Check the resistance of the RTD for a nominal value of 1,000 Ω.
4. Replace the vortex sensor.
184 MI 019-224
Maintenance Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Maintenance
Process Fluid Warnings
WARNING
HAZARD OF ESCAPING CHEMICALS
If process containing parts are to be disassembled:
• Make sure that process fluid is not under pressure or at high temperature.
• Take proper precautions concerning leakage or spillage of any toxic or otherwise
dangerous fluid. Follow any Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or Safety Data
Sheet (SDS) recommendations.
equipment damage.
WARNING
HAZARD OF CORROSION
The flowmeters are built using materials that are corrosion resistant to a wide
variety of fluids. However, with aggressive fluids, a potential exists for corrosive
failure. Therefore, verify the material compatibility with the NACE guidelines and/or
user knowledge of the flowmeter material compatibility with the process fluid at
operating conditions.
equipment damage.
CAUTION
RISK OF PERSONAL AND PROPERTY DAMAGE
Personnel involved in the maintenance of vortex flowmeters must be trained and
qualified in the use of the equipment required, and in the removal and replacement
of the flowmeter in the piping. They must also be qualified for the routine
maintenance of the flowmeter’s components.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
NOTICE
Components in your flowmeter are ESD-sensitive, and thus are susceptible to
damage resulting from electrostatic discharge. When performing maintenance in
the electronics compartment or remote junction box, or when working with the
housing cover removed, ground yourself with a conductive wrist strap or stand on
an ESD mat.
MI 019-224 185
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Maintenance
Maintenance Overview
The operation of the Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters consists of three basic functions:
• Generating and shedding vortices in the fluid stream
• Sensing vortices
• Amplifying, conditioning, and processing the signal from the vortex sensor
If you suspect a malfunction of the flowmeter, you can usually isolate the cause to one
of these functions.
Vortex Generation and Shedding

Vortex generation and shedding can be degraded or destroyed by disturbances in the
upstream flow, the nature of the flowing fluid, or (rarely) by damage to the vortex
shedding element. Flow disturbances can be created by gaskets protruding into the
flowing stream; by some form of partial blockage in the upstream piping; by the piping
configuration; or by the existence of two-phase flow.
Should the vortex shedding element become heavily caked, coated, or physically
damaged to the extent that its basic shape or dimensions are changed, the vortex
shedding process can be impaired.
NOTE: The length of straight, unobstructed upstream piping is important. Refer to
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance, page 32.
Vortex Sensing
The Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters employ two basic types of sensors: standard
temperature range, and extended temperature range.
• The standard temperature range sensor can be filled with Fluorolube for
applications with process temperature limits of -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), or
with silicone oil for applications with process temperature limits of -20 and +200°
C (0 and 400°F).
• The sanitary flowmeter sensor is filled with NEOBEE® M-20 fluid for applications
with process temperature limits of -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F).
The standard temperature range sensor consists of a piezoelectric bimorph
crystal that is sealed inside a liquid-filled capsule having two diaphragms on
opposing sides. The vortex shedding process creates an alternating differential
pressure across the capsule. The pressure is transmitted to the crystal via the
diaphragms and fill fluid.
• The extended temperature range sensor is an unfilled sensor for applications up
to 371°C (700°F).
The extended temperature range sensor consists of two piezoelectric crystals
sealed inside a capsule having two process diaphragms, on opposing sides,
connected internally by a mechanical shuttle. The vortex shedding process
creates an alternating differential pressure across the capsule. The pressure is
transmitted to the crystals via the diaphragm-shuttle mechanism.
The alternating force acting on the crystals causes them to develop a pulsed
voltage with a frequency equal to the vortex shedding frequency. Damage to the
sealing diaphragms, or other physical damage, can cause the sensors to operate
improperly.
186 MI 019-224
Replacing the Electronics Module

The electronics module is located in the flowmeter housing, opposite the side with the
retention clip. On the back of the electronics module (and on its side, if your flowmeter
has an RTD) are several connectors:
Table 122 - Connectors on the Electronics Module
Number of Pins Description
2 Pulse Output
to terminal block
6 Power
to potted neck module
Communication
4 (on side)
Temperature Sensor Ribbon Cable (if applicable)
to potted neck module
NOTICE
The replacement part is shipped in a protective antistatic bag. Do not remove the
part from this bag until you are ready to install it. This helps prevent damage due to
accidental electrostatic discharge.
Removing the Electronics Module

1. Shut off power to the flowmeter.
2. If the flowmeter electronics compartment has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock
screw into the housing to unlock the cover.
3. Remove the cover from the electronics compartment. The electronics
compartment is the side with the optional display. If you do not have an optional
display, the electronics compartment is to the left of the ground symbol on the
outside of the housing.
If you cannot remove the cover by hand, insert a flat bar in the cover slot.
MI 019-224 187
4. If an optional display is mounted to the electronics module, remove it by

loosening the two mounting screws and unplugging the ribbon cable from the
front of the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
Figure 86 - Optional Display Connection
RIBBON CABLE
CONNECTOR
ELECTRONICS
MODULE
5. Loosen the two captive screws, one on each side of the electronics module.
6. Pull the electronics module out of the housing just far enough to be able to reach
the cable connectors on the back of the electronics module.
7. Disconnect the cables from the back (and side, if the flowmeter has a
temperature sensor) of the electronics module.
8. Remove the electronics module from the housing.
188 MI 019-224
Installing the Electronics Module

1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the electronics module, if you have
not done so already. Refer to Removing the Electronics Module, page 187.
2. Remove the new electronics module from its protective bag.
3. Connect the cables to the terminal blocks on the back (and side, if applicable) of
the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
The connectors are designed to fit only in the correct terminal blocks, and in the
correct orientation on the electronics module.
Figure 87 - Electronics Module Connections

MODBUS OUTPUT
AND POWER CONNECTOR
(8 WIRES)
MODBUS
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTOR ELECTRONICS
(4 WIRES) MODULE
ELECTRONICS PREAMPLIFIER CABLE

MODULE OR SENSOR WIRES (4)
4. Back the two electronics module captive screws out of the module until the
screws are captured by the plastic housing.
5. Rotating the electronics module no more than one full turn to take up the slack in
the wires, place the module in the housing over the two mounting holes.
6. Tighten the captive mounting screws, taking care that no wires are pinched under
the module.
7. If the electronics module was equipped with an optional display, reinstall the
display. Carefully fold the ribbon cable in the space between the display and the
electronics module so that it is not pinched. The display molding should rest firmly
against the module molding before you tighten the mounting screws. See
Optional Display Connection, page 188.
8. Configure the new electronics module to match the one that was just removed.
9. Replace the electronics compartment cover before operating the flowmeter. If the
housing has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock outwards from the housing to lock
the cover.
MI 019-224 189
Replacing the Potted Neck Module

All Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters have a printed wiring board located in a potted
module that resides in the neck of the instrument. This potted neck module functions
as a preamplifier, barrier, and/or interface depending on the model:
• In all Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters, it acts as an interface module.
• In an integrally-mounted flowmeter that has an extended temperature range
sensor, it acts as a preamplifier module.
• In a flowmeter that has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, it acts as
a barrier module. These flowmeters also have a PE ground in the electronics
housing. This ground must be disconnected as part of the replacement
procedure.
Refer to the following diagram when replacing the potted neck module.
Figure 88 - Potted Neck Module and Preamplifier Assembly — Integrally

Mounted
HOUSING
PE
GROUND
SCREW
RETENTION CLIP
POTTED NECK
MODULE
CUP
O-RING
NECK
CUP
190 MI 019-224
NOTICE
Removing the Potted Neck Module

Refer to Potted Neck Module and Preamplifier Assembly — Integrally Mounted, page
190.
1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the electronics module. Refer to
Removing the Electronics Module, page 187. (You do not need to disconnect the
display).
2. If the flowmeter has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, disconnect
the two green PE ground wires from the PE ground screw in the electronics
housing.
3. Remove the red lacquer from the anti-rotation screw.
4. Remove the anti-rotation screw completely, and slide the clip off of the housing.
Save the screw and clip.
5. Remove the housing by rotating it counterclockwise as viewed from the top.
6. Remove the two screws on the black potting cup. Save the screws.
7. Remove the module from the cup.
8. Flip the potting cup over to access the two 4-position terminal blocks.
9. Disconnect the wires from the 4-position terminal block(s) on the potted neck
module.
Installing the Potted Neck Module

1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the potted neck module, if you have
not done so already. Refer to Removing the Potted Neck Module, page 191.
2. Remove the new potted neck module from its protective bag.
3. Feed the wires from the sensor through the hole in the center of the neck
machining and connect them to the two 4-position terminal blocks on the potted
neck module, using the color codes on the wires and labels.
4. Install the potted neck module into its cup and secure it with the two screws
previously removed.
5. Feed the electronics cable, temperature sensor cable (if applicable), and PE
ground wires (if applicable) through the housing neck and into the electronics
compartment.
MI 019-224 191
6. Inspect the cup o-ring for damage. If the o-ring is damaged, replace it with the
appropriate o-ring.
WARNING
RISK OF ANSI/ISA NONCOMPLIANCE
Failure to reuse or install the proper cup o-ring for a CSA-labeled product
violates ANSI/ISA 12.27.01.
equipment damage.
7. Lubricate the o-ring with silicone lubricant (part number 0048130 or equivalent).
Verify that the o-ring is situated in the groove of the neck.
8. Screw the housing onto the cup. Hand-tighten until it bottoms. Do not over-
tighten.
9. If the flowmeter has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, reconnect
the two green PE ground wires to the PE ground screw in the electronics housing.
10. Insert the retention clip over the boss in the housing neck so that the hole in the
clip is aligned with the hole in the boss. Refer to the diagram.
RETENTION CLIP
ANTI-ROTATION
SCREW
11. Rotate the housing up to one full turn counterclockwise for optimum access.
12. Tighten the anti-rotation screw (to a torque of 7 lbf-in) and fill the screw recess
with red lacquer (part number X0180GS or equivalent).
13. Connect the cables to the terminal blocks on the back (and side, if applicable) of
the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
The connectors are designed to fit only in the correct terminal blocks, and in the
correct orientation on the electronics module.
Figure 89 - Electronics Module Connections

MODBUS OUTPUT
AND POWER CONNECTOR
(8 WIRES)
MODBUS
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTOR ELECTRONICS
(4 WIRES) MODULE
ELECTRONICS PREAMPLIFIER CABLE

MODULE OR SENSOR WIRES (4)
192 MI 019-224
14. Back the two electronics module captive screws out of the module until the
screws are captured by the plastic housing.
15. Rotating the electronics module no more than one full turn to take up the slack in
the wires, place the module in the housing over the two mounting holes.
16. Tighten the captive mounting screws, taking care that no wires are pinched under
the module.
17. Replace the electronics compartment cover before operating the flowmeter. If the
housing has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock outwards from the housing to lock
the cover.
Replacing the Preamplifier

All remotely mounted flowmeters have a preamplifier. For flowmeters with remotely
mounted electronics, use the procedures in this section.
Integrally mounted flowmeters with extended temperature range sensors also have a
preamplifier; however, this preamplifier is located on the potted neck module. Refer to
Replacing the Potted Neck Module, page 190 for instructions.
Integrally mounted flowmeters with standard temperature range do not have a
preamplifier.
Figure 90 - Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted
WIRE COVER
BRACKET
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR WIRES TEMPERATURE
(INPUT) SENSOR WIRES
(OUTPUT)
VORTEX
SENSOR WIRES VORTEX SENSOR
(INPUT) AND POWER WIRES
(OUTPUT)
TO
ELECTRONICS
HOUSING
SET SCREW
MI 019-224 193
NOTICE
Removing the Preamplifier

Refer to Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted, page 193.
1. Shut off power to the flowmeter.
2. Rotate the set screw into the junction box to unlock the cover. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the wire cover bracket. Save the screws.
4. Disconnect all of the wires from the front of the preamplifier module.
5. Remove the two screws securing the preamplifier. Save the screws.
6. Lift the preamplifier out of the junction box.
Installing the Preamplifier

Refer to Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted, page 193.
1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the preamplifier, if you have not done
so already. Refer to Removing the Preamplifier, page 194.
2. Remove the new preamplifier from its protective bag. Be sure to install the correct
board:
• L0123HT — standard temperature
• L0123HV — extended temperature
3. Connect the yellow and brown sensor wires to the 2-position Y/B terminal block
on the neck board.
4. If the flowmeter has a temperature sensor, attach the ribbon cable to the R/R/N/N
terminal block on the neck board.
5. Connect the remaining wires to the 4-position terminal blocks in accordance with
the color coding shown on the labels.
6. Mount the new preamplifier in the junction box using the two screws from the old
preamplifier.
7. Verify that the wires are fully engaged in the connectors. Lightly tug each wire to
verify that it is firmly held in place by the connector, on the metal conductor and
not on the wire insulation. If any wires are not engaged, press the lever in the
connector, insert the bare conductor, and release the lever, checking again that
the wire is firmly clamped.
194 MI 019-224
8. Add the wire cover bracket and secure it with the screws you saved when you
removed it.
9. Replace the junction box cover. Rotate the set screw outwards from the junction
box to lock the cover before operating the flowmeter.
Replacing the Sensor

Always shut down the pipeline and empty it before you loosen the bonnet bolts.
If the flowmeter housing is in a vertical mounting position, you do not need to remove
the flowmeter from the pipeline in order to replace the sensor. However, the flowmeter
housing must be in a vertical mounting position so that the bonnet bolts can be
properly torqued. If the flowmeter housing is not mounted vertically, remove the
flowmeter from the line before performing a sensor replacement.
Replacing the sensor does not cause a shift in the K-factor. Therefore, the flowmeter
does not require recalibration.
Refer to MI 019-223 for sensor replacement procedures.
Replacing or Adding a Digital Display/Configurator

It may be necessary to replace the existing display or you may choose to add a
display to a flowmeter that does not have one installed.
Refer to MI 019-198 for instructions on replacing or adding a digital display/
configurator to the flowmeter.
• When replacing an existing display, use the M84/84C Replacement Kit (Part
number K0149GV).
• When adding a new display to a flowmeter that did not have one, use the M84/
84C Conversion Kit (Part number K0149GS).
MI 019-224 195
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Model Code
Model Code
These tables list all of the options, including other electronics versions, for the Model
84C Vortex Flowmeters.
Flanged Body Style

Table 123 - Model Code for 84CF Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
84C Vortex Flowmeter
Body Style
F Flanged
Nominal Line Size
008 DN15; 15 mm (3/4 in)
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
015 DN40; 40 mm (1 1/2 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
040 DN100; 100 mm (4 in)
060 DN150; 150 mm (6 in)
080 DN200; 200 mm (8 in)66
100 DN250; 250 mm (10 in)
120 DN300; 300 mm (12 in)
Electronics Version
-T HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output
-L Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA
-M Modbus Communication
Pulse Output
P Pulse Output Capability
Body, Shedder Bar, and Flange Material
ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar

R • 316 ss Flanges for Line Sizes 008 to 040
• 304 ss Flanges for Line Sizes 060 to 080
E Fabricated 304 ss Body and Shedder Bar, with 304 ss Flanges (Line Sizes 100 to 120)
316 ss with face-to-face lengths that are backwards compatible with Style A Model 84 Vortex Flowmeters67
Y • For Line Sizes 008 to 040, Cast 316 ss (CF8M) Body and Shedder Bar with 316 ss Flanges
• Line Sizes 060 to 120 already have backward-compatible face-to-face lengths
66. For Line Size 080 with End Connection F4, F5, T4, T5, D5, or B5, Optional Welding Certificate -X is included.
67. Selection Y is recommended only for replacement of Style A flowmeters that have lay-length differences greater than ±6.35 mm (1/4 inch).
196 MI 019-224
Model Code Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Table 123 - Model Code for 84CF Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
End Connections and Flange Pressure Rating
F1 ANSI Class 150 Raised Face

F4 ANSI Class 900 Raised Face (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
F5 ANSI Class 1500 Raised Face (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
T1 ANSI Class 150 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Size 008)
T2 ANSI Class 300 Ring-Type Joint
T3 ANSI Class 600 Ring-Type Joint
T4 ANSI Class 900 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
T5 ANSI Class 1500 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
D1 PN16 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 040)
D2 PN25 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 060)
D3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove
D6 PN63 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 015)68
D7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove
D5 PN160 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008, 100, and 120)
B1 PN16 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 040)
B2 PN25 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 060)
B3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1
B6 PN63 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 015)69
B7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2
B5 PN160 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2 (not available with Line Sizes 008, 100, and 120)
C3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type F
C7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type F
Single or Dual Measurement; Isolation Manifold
S Single Measurement; No Isolation Manifold
Multivariable Selection
N None
T Temperature Compensation up to 260°C (500°F)70
68. For Line Sizes 008, 010, and 015, select End Connection D7.
69. For Line Sizes 008, 010, and 015, select End Connection B7.
70. For Multivariable Selection T, pulse output is always enabled.
MI 019-224 197
Code Description
Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and Material
Standard Temperature Range (with Fill Fluid)
D Fluorolube Fill, -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M71
F Fluorolube Fill, -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
R Silicone Fill, -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M71
S Silicone Fill, -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)
A Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M71 72
B Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M72
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M71 73 74
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M73 74
Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing
T Aluminum, Integral, Top-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections
V Aluminum, Integral, Top-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections
R Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections75
W Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections75
Local Digital Indicator/Configurator
N No Digital Indicator/Configurator
J Digital Indicator/Configurator
Electrical Certifications (refer to Electrical Certifications, page 27)76
AA ATEX Intrinsically Safe77
AD ATEX Flameproof
BA INMETRO Intrinsically Safe77
BD INMETRO Flameproof78
CA CSA Intrinsically Safe77
CD CSA Explosionproof
CN CSA Division 277
EA IECEx Intrinsically Safe77
ED IECEx Flameproof
FA FM Intrinsically Safe77
FD FM Explosionproof
FN FM Nonincendive77
KD KCs Flameproof
72. With Multivariable Selection T, the temperature element of the RTD is rated to 260°C (500°F). Use care with a Vortex high temperature
sensor, which is rated to a higher temperature.
73. Not available with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection T).
74. Includes Optional Welding Certificate -X.
75. For remote mounting, select a cable length with the Cable for Connecting to Remote-Mounted Electronics option.
76. For detailed information or status of testing laboratory approvals/certifications, contact Global Customer Support.
77. Not available with Modbus (Electronics Version -M).
78. Contact Global Customer Support for availability.
198 MI 019-224
Code Description
NA NEPSI Intrinsically Safe79
ND NEPSI Flameproof80
RA EAC Intrinsically Safe79
RD EAC Flameproof80
YY CE mark only; PED controls and records
ZZ No CE mark; Do not install in European Union countries
Cable for Connecting to Remote-Mounted Electronics (Optional)
-B 6 m (20 ft) Cable
-D 9 m (30 ft) Cable
-E 12 m (40 ft) Cable
-G 15 m (50 ft) Cable
Certificates of Compliance/Conformance (Optional)
-L Standard Certificate of Compliance
-M Material Certification of Process Wetted Metal (Conforms to EN 10204 Type 3.1 Certificate)
-Q Process Wetted Parts Comply with NACE Standards MR-0175-2003 and MR-0103-2007
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT)
-P Hawke Cable Gland (available only with Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)
-R PG11 Cable Gland, Trumpet-Shaped (available only with Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)
Welding Certificate (Optional) (select only one)
-F Welding Certified to Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
Welding Certified to Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, and Radiographic (X-Ray) Examination of
-X
Welds81
Tamper-Resistant Options
-A Tamper-Resistant Sealing for Housing and Covers
-S Tamper-Resistant Cover over Bonnet Bolts
Miscellaneous Optional Selections
Cleaning of Process Wetted Parts for Oxygen/Chlorine Service per Compressed Gas Association’s CGA G-4.1 and
-H
ASTM G9382
-J Gold-Plated Sensor
-N Calibration and Pressure Test Certified Copy
Adapter for 1/2–14 NPT Conduit (available only with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing code R, and with
-T Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)

81. This option is already included with: Line Size 080 with End Connection F4, F5, T4, T5, D5, or B5; and with Sensor Fill, Temperature Range,
and Material codes E and G.
82. Available only with sensors that have Fluorolube fill. Not available with unfilled sensors or sensors that have silicone fill.
MI 019-224 199
Wafer Body Style

Table 124 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
W Wafer
Nominal Line Size
008 DN15; 15 mm (3/4 in)
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
015 DN40; 40 mm (1 1/2 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
040 DN100; 100 mm (4 in)
060 DN150; 150 mm (6 in)
080 DN200; 200 mm (8 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
Body and Shedder Bar Material
R ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar
H ASTM A494-CW2M (Nickel Alloy) Body and Shedder Bar83 (Line Sizes 008 to 040)
Mounting and Centering System
Centering for:
• ANSI Class 150, 300, and 600 Flanges (Line Sizes 008 to 040)
W1 • PN16 Flanges (Line Sizes 010 to 030)
• PN40 Flanges (Line Sizes 010 to 030, 060, and 080)
• PN63 and PN100 Flanges (All Line Sizes)
W3 Centering for ANSI Class 600 Flanges (Line Sizes 060 to 080)
W4 Centering for PN16 Flanges (Line Sizes 040 to 080)
W5 Centering for PN40 Flanges (Line Size 040)
W9 Centering for PN16 and PN40 Flanges (Line Size 008)
200 MI 019-224
Table 124 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
N None
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)86
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M85
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
AD ATEX Flameproof
CN CSA Division 289
ED IECEx Flameproof

MI 019-224 201
Table 124 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
KD KCs Flameproof
RD EAC Flameproof92
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT) (Optional)
-H
ASTM G9393

202 MI 019-224
NPT (Threaded) Body Style

Table 125 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
N NPT (Male) Threaded Connection
Nominal Line Size
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
R ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar
End Connections and Pressure Rating
NPT Male Connection and:

V4 • ANSI Class 1500 Pressure Rating (Line Size 010)
• ANSI Class 900 Pressure Rating (Line Size 020)
N None

MI 019-224 203
Table 125 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)
A Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M96 97
B Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M97
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M96 98
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M98
AD ATEX Flameproof
CN CSA Division 2101
ED IECEx Flameproof
KD KCs Flameproof102
RD EAC Flameproof102
98. Not available with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection T).
204 MI 019-224
Table 125 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT) (Optional)
-H
ASTM G93103
MI 019-224 205
Sanitary Body Style

Table 126 - Model Code for 84CS Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
S Sanitary
Nominal Line Size
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
R 316/316L ss Tubing, 316L ss Shedder
End Connections
C0 3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent)
T0 3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent)
None
N (no temperature compensation)
C Neobee M-20 Fill, -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F)
R Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections
W Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections
AD ATEX Flameproof
206 MI 019-224
Table 126 - Model Code for 84CS Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
ED IECEx Flameproof
KD KCs Flameproof107
RD EAC Flameproof107

MI 019-224 207
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Nominal Dimensions
Nominal Dimensions
For dimensional information specific to your sales order, contact your sales
representative to order a Certified Dimensional Print (CDP).
mm
All dimensions in diagrams are shown in millimeters over inches ( in ).
Dimensions for 84C Flanged Body Flowmeters

Figure 91 - Flanged Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics
Housing
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
CONDUIT
CONNECTION EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
224 STANDARD TEMP.
EXTERNAL 8.8
OR
GROUND
315 EXTENDED TEMP.
12.4
A B
FLOWMETER
BODY FLANGE
DIMENSION IN
ACCORDANCE WITH
EN 1092-1 AND ANSI B16.5 C
Figure 92 - Flanged Body Flowmeter with Junction Box

112
4.4
STANDARD TEMP. 205

OR 8.0
EXTENDED TEMP. 296
11.6
D
B A
208 MI 019-224
Nominal Dimensions Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Table 127 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code R or E
Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension C108

Nominal Dimension
Line Size Type A (OD) B (ID) RF Flange RTJ Flange D
Class 150 3.88 in 6.56 in —
Class 300 6.94 in 7.32 in

4.62 in
008 Class 600 0.74 in 7.44 in 7.44 in 1.82 in
Class 900
5.12 in 8.44 in 8.44 in
Class 1500
Class 150 4.25 in 6.80 in 7.18 in
Class 300 7.32 in 7.70 in
4.88 in
010 Class 600 0.96 in 7.82 in 7.82 in 1.93 in
Class 900
5.88 in 8.70 in 8.70 in
Class 1500
Class 150 5.00 in 7.32 in 7.70 in
Class 300 7.82 in 8.20 in
6.12 in
015 Class 600 1.50 in 8.44 in 8.44 in 2.20 in
Class 900
7.00 in 9.44 in 9.44 in
Class 1500
Class 150 6.00 in 7.75 in 8.13 in
Class 300 8.25 in 8.75 in
6.50 in 1.94 in 2.32 in
020 Class 600 9.01 in 9.13 in
Class 900
8.50 in 11.25 in 11.37 in
Class 1500 1.69 in 2.20 in
Class 150 7.50 in 8.88 in 9.26 in
Class 300 9.62 in 10.12 in
8.25 in 2.87 in 2.75 in
030 Class 600 10.38 in 10.50 in
Class 900 9.50 in 11.88 in 12.00 in
Class 1500 10.50 in 2.63 in 13.12 in 13.25 in 2.62 in
Class 150 9.00 in 9.62 in 10.00 in
Class 300 10.00 in 10.38 in 10.88 in
3.83 in
040 Class 600 10.75 in 12.12 in 12.24 in 3.35 in
Class 900 11.50 in 13.12 in 13.24 in
Class 1500 12.25 in 3.44 in 13.88 in 14.00 in
Class 150 11.00 in 12.00 in 12.38 in
Class 300 12.50 in 5.76 in 12.76 in 13.26 in
060 Class 600 14.00 in 14.74 in 14.86 in 4.42 in
Class 900 15.00 in 16.50 in 16.62 in
5.19 in
Class 1500 15.50 in 19.00 in 19.25 in
108. For line sizes 008 through 010, the overall length (dimension C) is ±6.4 mm (±0.250 in). For line size 120, the overall length is ±8.9 mm
(±0.350 in).
MI 019-224 209
Table 127 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code R or E
(Continued)
Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension C109

Nominal Dimension
Line Size Type A (OD) B (ID) RF Flange RTJ Flange D
Class 150 13.50 in 15.00 in 15.38 in

Class 300 15.00 in 7.63 in 15.75 in 16.26 in
080 Class 600 16.50 in 18.00 in 18.12 in 5.47 in
Class 900 18.50 in 20.26 in 20.38 in
6.81 in
Class 1500 19.00 in 24.26 in 24.64 in
Class 150 16.00 in 15.00 in 15.38 in
100 Class 300 17.50 in 9.56 in 16.24 in 16.74 in 6.55 in
Class 600 20.00 in 19.5 in 19.62 in
Class 150 19.00 in 17.00 in 17.38 in
120 Class 300 20.50 in 11.37 in 18.24 in 18.24 in 7.55 in
Class 600 22.00 in 20.74 in 20.76 in
Table 128 - Flanged Body, with DIN Flanges and Material Code R or E
Nominal Line Dimension Dimension Dimension

Flange Type Dimension D
Size A (OD) B (ID) C109
PN 40110 95 mm 138 mm
008 19 mm 46 mm
PN 100 105 mm 152 mm
PN 40110 115 mm 142 mm
010 PN 100 24.31 mm 49 mm
140 mm 178 mm
PN 160
PN 40110 150 mm 152 mm
015 PN 100 38.10 mm 186 mm 56 mm
170 mm
PN 160 190 mm
PN 40110 165 mm 166 mm
PN 63 180 mm 194 mm
020 49 mm 59 mm
PN 100 206 mm
195 mm
PN 160 220 mm
PN 40110 200 mm 202 mm
PN 63 215 mm 230 mm
030 73 mm 70 mm
PN 100 242 mm
230 mm
PN 160 258 mm
PN 40110 235 mm 222 mm
PN 63 250 mm 248 mm
040 97 mm 85 mm
PN 100 272 mm
265 mm
PN 160 292 mm
(±0.350 in).
110. May be used with a PN 25 mating flange.
210 MI 019-224
Table 128 - Flanged Body, with DIN Flanges and Material Code R or E
(Continued)
Nominal Line Dimension Dimension Dimension

Flange Type Dimension D
Size A (OD) B (ID) C111
PN 16 285 mm 237 mm
PN 40112 300 mm 277 mm
146 mm
060 PN 63 345 mm 317 mm 112 mm
PN 100 357 mm
355 mm
PN 160 132 mm 383 mm
PN 16 340 mm 302 mm
PN 25 360 mm 338 mm
PN 40 375 mm 194 mm 354 mm
080 139 mm
PN 63 415 mm 398 mm
PN 100 438 mm
430 mm
PN 160 173 mm 458 mm
PN 16 405 mm 318 mm
PN 25 425 mm 354 mm
100 PN 40 450 mm 243 mm 388 mm 166 mm
PN 63 470 mm 428 mm
PN 100 505 mm 492 mm
PN 16 460 mm 359 mm
PN 25 485 mm 387 mm
120 PN 40 515 mm 289 mm 433 mm 192 mm
PN 63 530 mm 483 mm
PN 100 585 mm 543 mm
Table 129 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code Y (Backward
Compatible with Style A)
Nominal Line Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension

Rating113 A (OD) B (ID) Dimension D
Size C114
Class 150 3.88 in

6.00 in
008 Class 300 0.74 in 1.82 in
4.62 in
Class 600 6.50 in
Class 150 4.25 in
6.50 in
010 Class 300 0.96 in 1.93 in
4.88 in
Class 600 7.00 in
Class 150 5.00 in
7.25 in
015 Class 300 1.50 in 2.20 in
6.12 in
Class 600 7.88 in
Class 300 7.75 in
020 6.50 in 1.94 in 2.32 in
Class 600 8.50 in
(±0.350 in).
112. May be used with a PN 25 mating flange.
113. For ANSI flanges, material code Y offers face-to-face lengths that are backward compatible with the Style A vortex flowmeters model code
selection S. Use material code Y when replacing a Model 84F Style A meter.
114. Overall length (C) is ±0.250 in (±6.4 mm).
MI 019-224 211
Table 129 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code Y (Backward
Compatible with Style A) (Continued)
Nominal Line Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension

Rating115 A (OD) B (ID) Dimension D
Size C116
Class 300 8.75 in

030 8.25 in 2.87 in 2.75 in
Class 600 9.50 in
Class 300 10.00 in 9.50 in
040 3.83 in 3.35 in
Class 600 10.75 in 10.50 in
Figure 93 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CF

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
FOR SURFACE OR BRACKET FOR
PIPE MOUNTING; SURFACE OR
USE BRACKET PIPE MOUNTING
AS TEMPLATE 353
WHEN SURFACE 13.9 CABLE TO U-BOLT SHOWN
MOUNTING FLOWTUBE FOR MOUNTING
ASSEMBLY VERTICAL DN 50
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
69.9 HORIZONTAL PIPE
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
NOTE: WHEN THE BRACKET IS USED FOR WALL MOUNTING, REPLACE THE U-BOLT WITH TWO
OR FOUR 0.375 in BOLTS LONG ENOUGH TO PASS THROUGH THE BRACKET AND SURFACE.
115. For ANSI flanges, material code Y offers face-to-face lengths that are backward compatible with the Style A vortex flowmeters model code
selection S. Use material code Y when replacing a Model 84F Style A meter.
116. Overall length (C) is ±0.250 in (±6.4 mm).
212 MI 019-224
Dimensions for 84C Wafer Body Flowmeters

Figure 94 - Wafer Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics Housing
CONDUIT
96 CONNECTION 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
CONDUIT EXTENDED
CONNECTION COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
186 STANDARD TEMP.

7.3 EXTERNAL
OR
277 EXTENDED TEMP. GROUND
10.9
B A
Figure 95 - Wafer Body Flowmeter with Junction Box
112
4.4
186 STANDARD TEMP.

7.3
OR
277 EXTENDED TEMP.
10.9
D
A B
Table 130 - Wafer Body Dimensions
Nominal Line Dimension A Dimension B

(OD) (ID)118 Dimension C Dimension D
Size117
57.2 mm 18.8 mm 79.5 mm 36.6 mm

008 (2.25 in) (0.74 in) (3.13 in) (1.44 in)
66.8 mm 24.3 mm 79.5 mm 39.4 mm

010 (2.63 in) (0.96 in) (3.13 in) (1.55 in)
117. Flowmeter body fits between ANSI Class 150, 300, or 600 raised face flanges, or between PN 16, 40, 63, or 100 flanges.
118. Bore equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.
MI 019-224 213
Table 130 - Wafer Body Dimensions (Continued)
Nominal Line Dimension A Dimension B

(OD) (ID)120 Dimension C Dimension D
Size119
85.9 mm 38.1 mm 79.5 mm 46.2 mm

015 (3.38 in) (1.50 in) (3.13 in) (1.82 in)
104.6 mm 49.2 mm 79.5 mm 49.3 mm

020 (4.12 in) (1.94 in) (3.13 in) (1.94 in)
136.7 mm 72.9 mm 95.3 mm 60.2 mm

030 (5.38 in) (2.87 in) (3.75 in) (2.37 in)
174.5 mm 96.7 mm 120.7 mm 73.9 mm

040 (6.87 in) (3.81 in) (4.75 in) (2.91 in)
222.3 mm 147.3 mm 177.8 mm 98.0 mm

060 (8.75 in) (5.80 in) (7.00 in) (3.86 in)
279.4 mm 193.0 mm 228.6 mm 122.9 mm

080 (11.00 in) (7.60 in) (9.00 in) (4.84 in)
Figure 96 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CW

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
119. Flowmeter body fits between ANSI Class 150, 300, or 600 raised face flanges, or between PN 16, 40, 63, or 100 flanges.
120. Bore equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.
214 MI 019-224
Dimensions for 84C NPT Body Flowmeters

Figure 97 - NPT Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics Housing
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
Figure 98 - NPT Body Flowmeter with Junction Box
112
4.4
STANDARD TEMP. 205

8.0
OR
296
EXTENDED TEMP. 11.6
MI 019-224 215
Table 131 - NPT Body Dimensions
Dimension A
Nominal Line Dimension B (ID)
Standard Extended Dimension C
Size
Temperature Temperature
010 251 mm (9.9 in) 342 mm (13.5 in) 24.3 mm (0.96 in) 101.6 mm (4.0 in)
020 277 mm (10.9 in) 368 mm (14.5 in) 49.2 mm (1.94 in) 152.4 mm (6.0 in)
Figure 99 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CN

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
216 MI 019-224
Dimensions for 84C Sanitary Flowmeters

Figure 100 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CS
188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
Figure 101 - Interconnecting Cable to Electronics Housing for 84CS
INTERCONNECTING CABLE
TO ELECTRONICS HOUSING END CONNECTION
4.5 m (15 ft) CONFIGURATION AND
DIMENSIONS IN
SEPARATE TABLE
FLOWMETER
BODY
I.D. O.D.
C0, T0
Table 132 - Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions
Flowmeter Body Dimensions
End Connections122
Nominal Line Size I.D.121 O.D. C0 T0
020 47.50 mm (1.87 in) 50.8 mm (2.0 in) 155 mm (6.1 in) 127 mm (5.0 in)
030 72.90 mm (2.87 in) 76.2 mm (3.0 in) 213 mm (8.4 in) 178 mm (7.0 in)
121. Equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.

122. Tube length for each end connection.
MI 019-224 217
Figure 102 - End Connection for 84CS
3A I-LINE FITTING (CODE C0) 3-A TRI-CLOVER FITTING (CODE T0)
O.D.* I.D.* D O.D.* I.D.* E D
12.7
W
0.50
C0* T0*
NOTE: Refer to Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions, page 217 for values of
O.D., I.D., and tube lengths for connections C0 and T0.
Table 133 - Sanitary Flowmeter End Connection Dimensions
End Connection Dimensions123

Code C0 Code T0
Nominal Line Size D W D E
020 67.06 mm (2.64 in) 26.19 mm (1.03 in) 64.0 mm (2.52 in) 56.4 mm (2.22 in)
030 98.3 mm (3.87 in) 30.96 mm (1.22 in) 90.9 mm (3.58 in) 83.3 mm (3.28 in)
123. See the Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions, page 217 for dimensions for the O.D., End Connections, and I.D.
218 MI 019-224
Parts List Model 84C with Modbus Communication
Parts List
Electronics Housing
The electronics housing can be integrally mounted to the flowtube, or remotely
mounted to a bracket. See Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 222 for remote
mounting parts and configuration.
Figure 103 - Electronics Housing Assembly
FIELD WIRING END TERMINAL

BLOCK
11 7 SOLID COVER
6 3
4 1
10
23
24
7 22
3
DATA PLATE ENCIRCLES NECK 2
OF ELECTRONICS HOUSING
ELECTRONICS END
8 POWER WIRES TO 9
TERMINAL BLOCK
15
EXTENDED LENGTH
WINDOW COVER WHEN
INDICATOR/CONFIGURATOR
(ITEM 9) IS SELECTED
3
1
CONNECTOR
16 5 FOR CABLE
FROM INDICATOR/
CONFIGURATOR
12 4
21 19
20 STANDARD LENGTH SOLID
COVER WHEN INDICATOR/
CONFIGURATOR (ITEM 9)
IS NOT SELECTED
3 14 18
5
13
17
MI 019-224 219
Model 84C with Modbus Communication Parts List
Table 134 - Parts for Electronics Housing Assembly
Item Part No. Qty. Part Name
1 D0162AP 2 Cover, Aluminum; No Indicator/Configurator
2 K0147YA 1 Cover, Aluminum; with Window; used when Indicator/

Configurator is selected, replaces Item 1 on electronics end
3 X0114AT A/R Grease, 14 ounce can
4 X0201FC 2 O-Ring, Cover
5 Below 1 Electronics Module Assembly
K0168GF HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output (Version -T)
K0168RS Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA

(Version -L)
D0219DB Modbus Communication (Version -M)
6 Below 1 Terminal Block Assembly - with Pulse Output (includes 4

mounting screws)
K0168QY HART Communication or Low Power, Non-Explosionproof

Installations
K0168QZ HART Communication or Low Power, Flameproof/
Explosionproof Installations
K0171BU Modbus Communication

7 D0162VJ 2 Screw Assembly, Plated ss, 0.164-32 x 0.375
8 B1270KE A/R Sealant, Thread
9 K0149GV 1 Digital Indicator/Configurator Replacement Kit (includes

indicator/configurator, label, screws, and instructions)
10 D0162WM 2 Screw, Cover Lock, 0.164-32124
11 X0144KR 1 O-Ring, Terminal Block
12 Potted Cup Assembly Module; see Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers, page 221
13 X0144KW 1 O-Ring, Housing Neck
14 K0168GG 1 Cup Housing Neck, Machining
15 Below 1 Plug, Pipe
B0139CA 1/2 NPT; Aluminum; with Housing Codes T and R
D0179FK M20; ss; with Housing Codes V and W
WARNING
RISK OF MOISTURE INGRESS
To maintain IP66 (IEC 60529) and NEMA Type 4X protection, the unused conduit
opening must be closed with a metal plug. In addition, the threaded housing
covers must be properly installed.
equipment damage.
16 X0174GF 2 Screw, Panhead; Cross Recessed; ss; M4 x 0.7 x 28 mm
17 K0148TQ 1 Nut, Jam; Hexhead; ss; 0.500-14
124. Cover lock screws are provided with ATEX/IECEx/NEPSI flameproof electrical certifications. They are used to help prevent rotation of the
housing covers. To remove a cover, turn the screw clockwise until the screw clears the cover groove; then remove the cover. To put the cover
back in place, screw the cover on, and then turn the screw counterclockwise until it engages the cover groove.
220 MI 019-224
Table 134 - Parts for Electronics Housing Assembly (Continued)
18 K0152KU 1 Harness, Test; Accessory125
19 K0152JV 1 Molding, PE Ground
20 K0152JX 1 Screw Assembly, PE Ground; ss; 0.164-32 x 0.315
21 X0133VN 1 Screw, Socket Head; ss; 0.132-32 x 0.437
22 D0197PS 1 Retention Clip
23 X0174EK 1 Button Head Screw

24 X0180GS 1 Red Lacquer
Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers

Table 135 - With Flameproof or Explosionproof Agency Certification
Multivariable Selection: No Temperature Compensation (N) Temperature Compensation (T)
Sensor Temperature Range: Standard Extended Standard Extended
Integrally Mounted K0168MW126 K0168MX K0168MW K0168MX

Electronics
Housing:
Remotely Mounted K0171CB K0168QD
Table 136 - With Non-Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification
Multivariable Selection: No Temperature Compensation (N) Temperature Compensation (T)
Sensor Temperature Range: Standard Extended Standard Extended
Integrally Mounted K0168GJ126 K0168HF K0168GJ K0168HF

Electronics
Housing:
Remotely Mounted K0168QB
125. The test harness provides a means for inputting a test frequency using a frequency generator, for users who require a test input for validation.
126. The 84CS (Sanitary) only uses Potted Cup Assembly Part Number K0168MW (with Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification) and
K0168GJ (with Non-Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification).
MI 019-224 221
Junction Box and Remote Mounting

Figure 104 - Junction Box and Remote Mounting for Flanged, Wafer, and NPT
Body Flowmeter
1
6
26 ITEM 11 OPTIONAL CONDUIT

CONNECTION (OPTION -T) IS
25 REQUIRED ON BOTH ENDS
OF CABLE ASSEMBLY WHEN
CONDUIT IS USED IN THE
INSTALLATION
12 12
8 9 11 ELECTRONICS HOUSING
3 10
ASSEMBLY PARTS
5 21
2
7
1
EXTENDED (HIGH)
24
TEMPERATURE
RANGE ASSEMBLY
SHOWN
18
23
19
BONNET ASSEMBLY
ATTACHES TO
FLOWTUBE BODY
2 20
13 15
16
14
POTTED END
OF CABLE
ASSEMBLY
22
OPTIONAL CONDUIT
CONNECTION (OPTION -T)
12 11
17
222 MI 019-224
Table 137 - Parts for Junction Box and Remote Mounting
1 K0152GB 1 Connection Head Assembly (Junction Box); for explosionproof;

ss. Includes housing, cover, cover lock, and cover o-ring
2 X0114AT A/R Grease, 14 ounce can
3 Below 1 Preamplifier Assembly
D0159SX Standard Temperature Remote
D0159SZ Extended Temperature Remote
4 X0173UN 2 Screw, Panhead; Cross-recessed; ss; M4 x 0.7 x 9 mm
5 K0168MT 2 Standoff, hexagonal head; ss; M4 x 10 mm
6 D0179EG 1 O-Ring, Cover; included in Item 1 but also available separately
7 Below 1 Cable Assembly, Remote Housing (includes Connector

Assembly)127
K0168HB 20 ft (6 m) long
K0168HC 30 ft (9 m) long
K0168HD 40 ft (12 m) long
K0168HE 50 ft (15 m) long
8 K0168RA 1 Adapter; 1.125 Hexhead; ss; 1/2 NPT and 0.500-20
9 K0168MU 1 Bushing, silicone rubber; 0.275 in long; 0.280 ID.
10 K0168MZ 1 Nut, Knurled; ss; 0.542 in long; 0.5-20
11 K0149LE 2 Connector, Conduit; Option -T (required when conduit is used)
12 B1270KE A/R Sealant, Thread
13 Housing; see Electronics Housing, page 219
14 K0148TQ 1 Nut, Jam; 1.259 Hexhead; ss; 0.500-20
15 K0149HR 1 Bracket Assembly, Mounting; painted steel
16 D0114SM 1 U-Bolt, 0.312-18; plated steel
17 0011962 2 Nut, 0.312-18; plated steel
18 X0143SL 1 Washer, Lock; Extended Tooth; ss; 0.875
19 K0168RY 1 Wire Cover Bracket

20 K0201QE 2 Standoff, Hex
127. The cable assembly is potted on the electronics housing end. The opposite end is assembled to the connection head assembly using a
bushing and a knurled nut. If a conduit is used during installation, a conduit connector is used at each end of the cable assembly. See
Remotely Mounted Electronics, page 52.
MI 019-224 223
Figure 105 - Remote Mounting for Sanitary Body Flowmeter

ELECTRONICS HOUSING
ASSEMBLY PARTS
4 3
6 7
9
10
8 11
12
INTEGRAL CABLE
ASSEMBLY
FLOWTUBE ASSEMBLY,
INCLUDES INTEGRAL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
13
224 MI 019-224
Table 138 - Parts for Remote Mounting (Sanitary Flowmeter only)
1 Below 1 Housing
K0171BW Housing, 1/2 NPT, AL
K0171BV Housing, M20, AL
2 X0174EK 1 Screw, But hd 8–32 x 0.25
3 D0197PS 1 Anti-Rotation Clip
4 X0174GF 2 Screw, Potting Cup
5 Below 1 Potted Cup Assembly
K0168GJ Potted Cup Assembly, I.S.
K0168MW Potted Cup Assembly, EX.
6 X0114AT A/R Grease

7 K0168GG 1 Neck Cup, Mach
8 X0144KW 1 Neck O-Ring
9 B1270KE A/R Thread Sealant

10 K0149HR 1 Remote Bracket
11 D0114SM 1 U-Bolt, Bracket, Remote
12 K0148TQ 1 Jam Nut
13 X0104CT 2 U-Bolt Nuts
MI 019-224 225
Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts

Figure 106 - Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts
1 2
5
6
9
7
10
11
Table 139 - Parts for Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Replacement Kits
1 Housing; see Electronics Housing, page 219
2 Junction Box; see Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 222
3 B1270KE A/R Thread Sealant

4 Bonnet Assembly, Standard or Extended Temperature Range (bonnet for extended
temperature range shown); see Bonnet Assemblies, page 227 for part numbers
5 X0114AT A/R Grease; 14 ounce can
226 MI 019-224
Table 139 - Parts for Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Replacement Kits
(Continued)
6 Below — Bonnet Bolts (also part of Item 7)
X0173SV 4 Standard Temperature, ASTM A193, Grade B7, plated steel.

Hexhead (0.625 hex); 0.437-14 x 2
X0174EY 4 Extended Temperature, ASTM A453, Stainless Steel,

grade 660. Hexhead 0.625 hex); 0.437-14 x 2
7 Sensor Replacement Kit, Standard or Extended Temperature Range (extended temperature

range sensor shown); items 3, 8, 9, 10, and 11, plus instructions; see Sensor and Seal
Replacement Kits, page 228 for part numbers
8 n/a O-Ring
9 n/a Sensor
10 n/a Gasket
11 n/a Flow Dam
Bonnet Assemblies
The bonnet assembly is a pressure containment component. Replacement of this
component requires pressure testing. Refer to MI 019-223.
Table 140 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CF and 84CN Flowmeters with
Temperature Compensation
Standard Temperature Extended Temperature
ATEX, CSA,
Line Size Non- Non- FM/CSA
Explosion- IECEx, and
Code Explosion- Explosion- Explosion-
proof Certs NEPSI
proof Certs proof Certs proof Certs Flameproof
Certs
008 to 030 K0168GM K0168HR K0168HK K0168HJ K0168HM
040 to 120 K0168HQ K0168HS K0168HL K0168HH K0168HN
Table 141 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CW Flowmeters with
Line Size Code Non- Non-

Explosionproof Explosionproof
Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0170AS K0170AQ K0170AW K0170AX
040 to 080 K0170AT K0170AR K0170AY K0170AZ
Table 142 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CF and 84CN Flowmeters
without Temperature Compensation

Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0152TV K0152TW K0156JY K0156JW
040 to 120 K0152TX K0152TY K0156JZ K0156JX
MI 019-224 227
Table 143 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CW Flowmeters without

Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0147GU K0147GT K0147GY K0147GX
040 to 080 K0148SK K0148SH K0148TM K0148TL
Sensor and Seal Replacement Kits

The sensor replacement kits are pressure containment components. Replacement of
these components requires pressure testing. Refer to MI 019-223.
NOTICE
• Do not use these kits for flowmeters that were purchased with the -H oxygen
service cleaning option. These require special cleaning. Contact Global
Customer Support for assistance.
• Do not use these kits for sanitary flowmeters. Sensors in sanitary flowmeters are
not user replaceable. Contact Global Customer Support to return the entire
flowmeter for repair or replacement.
• Do not use these kits to replace a gold-plated sensor. Contact Global Customer
Support for assistance.
Table 144 - Sensor Replacement Kits for 84C Flowmeters with Temperature
Compensation
Kit Description Kit Contents
Part No. Sensor Code Sensor Seal Kit128

K0169AD D K0168FT
K0169AC F K0168FR
K0168RJ
K0169AB R K0168FP
K0169AA S K0168FM
K0169AF A, E K0168GC K0168RL
K0169AE B, G K0168GB K0168RK
Table 145 - Seal Kit Contents for 84C Flowmeters with Temperature
Compensation
Seal Kit Contents

Seal Kit Part No. O-Ring or Grafoil
Gasket Flow Dam Bonnet Bolts (4)
Seal
K0168RJ X0145CM L0121DT L0112KT X0173SV
K0168RL K0146PT K0148VB
K0168RD X0174EY
K0168RK K0146HL K0148VA
128. See the next table for seal kit contents.
228 MI 019-224
Table 146 - Sensor Replacement Kits for 84C Flowmeters without Temperature
Compensation
Kit Description Kit Contents
Part No. Sensor Code Sensor Seal Kit129

K0161FL D K0148JK
K0161FK F K0148JJ
K0161EY
K0161FJ R K0148JH
K0161FH S K0148JG
K0161FN A, E K0148KQ K0161FA
K0161FM B, G K0148KN K0161EZ
Table 147 - Seal Kit Contents for 84C Flowmeters without Temperature
Compensation
Seal Kit Contents

Seal Kit Part No.
O-Ring Gasket Flow Dam Bonnet Bolts (4)
K0161EY D0100RP L0121DT L0112KT X0173SV

K0161FA K0146PT K0148VB
K0147CC X0174EY
K0161EZ K0146HL K0148VA
129. See the next table for seal kit contents.
MI 019-224 229
Optional Cable Selections -P and -R

Cable connector options -P and -R are for use with Electrical Housing Codes T and R
(1/2 NPT) only, and are available with Electrical Safety codes YY and ZZ only.
Figure 107 - Optional Cable Selections -P and -R

HAWKE-TYPE TRUMPET-TYPE
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND (PG 11)
1 OPTION -P 3 OPTION -R
2
PG11
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
CABLE CABLE
GLAND GLAND
Table 148 - Parts for Optional Cable Selections -P and -R
1 N7141HX 1 Hawke-Type Cable Gland (Option -P)
2 N7141KR 1 Adapter, 1/2 NPT to PG 11 (Part of Option -R)130
3 N7000AA 1 Trumpet-type Cable Gland — PG 11 (Part of Option -R)130
130. Option -R (Items 2 and 3) should be ordered as a set.
230 MI 019-224
Tamper-Resistant Cover for Bonnet Bolts (Option -S)
MI 019-224 231
Recommended Spare Parts Summary

Number of Parts
Item Recommended for
Part Number Part Name
No. 20
1 Inst. 5 Inst.
Inst.
See Electronics Housing, page 219
4 X0201FC O-Ring, Cover 2 4 8
5 Below Electronics Module Assembly 0 0 1
K0168GF HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output (Version -T)
K0168RS Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA (Version -L)
D0219DB Modbus Communication (Version -M)
9 K0149GV Digital Indicator/Configurator Replacement Kit 0 0 1
10 D0162WM Screw, Cover Lock131 2 4 8
12 Potted Cup Assembly Module; see Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers, page 221 1 2 4
13 X0144KW O-Ring, Housing Neck 1 2 4
See Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 222
3 Below Preamplifier Assembly 0 1 1
D0159SX Standard Temperature Remote
D0159SZ Extended Temperature Remote
6 D0179EG O-Ring, Cover; for Connection Head Assembly 1 2 4
See Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts, page 226
7 Sensor Replacement Kit, Standard or Extended Temperature Range; includes a sensor, seal kit; and 1 2 4
instructions; see Sensor and Seal Replacement Kits, page 228 for part numbers
131. Two cover lock screws are used with Electrical Safety Codes H, B, and S (ATEX, IECEx, and NEPSI flameproof units).
232 MI 019-224
Schneider Electric Systems USA, Inc.
70 Mechanic St.
Foxboro, MA 02035
United States of America
1-866-746-6477 inside the U.S.
1-508-549-2424 outside the U.S.
pasupport.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.
© 2019 – 2022 Schneider Electric Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.
MI 019-224

Flujómetro Intertec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flujómetro Intertec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flujómetro Intertec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intelligent Vortex Flowmeters

Model 84C with Modbus Communication

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps.....................................................39

Configuring a User Fluid.......................................................................... 100

Wafer Body Style ......................................................................................... 200

MI 019-222 Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

MI 019-179 Flow Products Safety Information (ATEX and IECEx)

Figure 1 - Sample Model Code

Table 1 - Modbus Communication Parameters

Communication Rate 4800, 9600 (default), or 19200 baud

Measurement Update Rate 4800 baud: 19 times/s

9600 baud: 38 times/s

19200 baud: 76 times/s

Table 2 - Operating Limits

Influence Operating Limits

Process Fluid liquid, gas, and steam

Process Temperature for Standard Temperature Flowmeters

(Only available for sanitary flowmeter body)

Process Temperature for Extended Temperature Flowmeters

Ambient Temperature (Housing)2

With local display -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)

Without local display -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F)

Relative Humidity 0 and 100%

Supply Voltage 9 and 30 V dc

Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)

Pulse Output • Raw mode: Vortex shedding frequency

Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)

Pulse Output Specifications

Power Supply Requirements

Nominal Flow Velocity Limits

Standard Temperature Range3 High Temperature Range4

Lower 3.0/√ρf 2.5/√ρf 6.0/√ρf 5.0/√ρf

Upper 300/√ρf 250/√ρf 300/√ρf 250/√ρf

Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor

3. Applies to flanged, wafer, NPT, and sanitary body styles.

Static Pressure Limits

Minimum Static Pressure

Maximum Static Pressure

Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

Paa pascals absolute No restriction

psia pounds per square inch absolute No restriction

Table 6 - Temperature Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

degF degrees Fahrenheit No restriction

degR degrees Rankine No restriction

Table 7 - Density Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

kg/l kilograms per liter No restriction

kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter No restriction

lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot No restriction

lb/gal pounds per US gallon No restriction

lb/Yd3 pounds per cubic yard No restriction

LT/Yd3 long tons per cubic yard No restriction

oz/in3 ounces per cubic inch No restriction

ST/Yd3 short tons per cubic yard No restriction

Table 8 - Mass Rate Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction